The Lighting Handbook

Your concise reference book – always ready to hand.

Chapter 1

Lighting technology and lighting application
Chapter 2

Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting
Based on the new European standards Chapter 3

Products
Chapter 4

Lamps and ballasts
Chapter 5

Lighting and room management
Chapter 6

Quickplan – calculating the n° of lum. required
Chapter 7

Technical information
Chapter 8

Checklists
Chapter 9

Services
Chapter 10

Notes

Imprint: For questions and suggestions on the “The Lighting Handbook”: Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA T +43/(0)5572/390-0 F +43/(0)5572/22 826

2nd edition, revised and updated, December 2008

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 1

Lighting technology and lighting application
What is light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic parameters used in lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminous flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminous intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traditional quality characteristics of lighting . . . . . . . . The right light – traditional and new quality criteria . Illuminance – definition of terminology . . . . . . . . . . Glare – glare limitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colour rendition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Humanergy Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) . . . Visual performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vitality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empowerment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3 4–5 4 5 5 5 6–8 6 6–7 7 8 8 9 10 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 15 16 16 – 18 17 17 17 18 18 19

What is light?
Light is that part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is perceived by our eyes.

What is light? Wavelength [m] 10-10 Gamma rays X-rays Ultraviolet Visible light 10
-5

What does the human eye see? Relative spectral brightness perception 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 Infrared Microwaves 0.2 350 450 550 650 750 Wavelength [nm] Wavelength [m] Night Day

100

Television, VSW Medium wave

105

Radio waves

By day we see in colour, while at night we can only see in shades of grey.

The Lighting Handbook

Light has a triple effect: – Light for visual functions – llumination of task area in conformity with relevant standards – glare-free and convenient – Light creating biological effects – Supporting people’s biological rhythms – Stimulating and motivating – Light for emotional perception – Pleasant lighting enhancing the interior design – Makes people relax and feel at ease The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 / 3 .

It is a measure of a lamp’s economic efficiency.Basic parameters used in lighting Luminous flux – Luminous intensity – Illuminance – Luminance Luminous flux q I= q E= q Lumen [lm] Luminous intensity I Illuminance E Candela [lm/sr]=[cd] Luminance L L= Lux [lm/m2]=[lx] L= [lm/(sr*m2)]=[cd/m2] solid angle into which luminous flux is emitted area hit by luminous flux visible areas of light source reflectance of area 3.14 for diffuse surface areas Abbreviation: Unit: q lm Phi Lumen 4 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook Luminous flux The luminous flux describes the quantity of light emitted by a light source. The luminous efficiency is the ratio of the luminous flux to the electrical power consumed (lm/W). .

The Lighting Handbook Abbreviation: Unit: L cd/m2 Chapter 1 / 5 . EN 12464 “Lighting of indoor workplaces”). Relevant standards specify the required illuminance (e. It specifies the brightness of a surface and is essentially dependent on its reflectance (finish and colour). It is represented by the luminous intensity distribution curve (LDC).g. Illuminance: (lm) E(lx) = luminous flux 2 area (m ) Abbreviation: Unit: E lx Lux Luminance Luminance is the only basic lighting parameter that is perceived by the eye. This is a useful measurement for directive lighting elements such as reflectors. Abbreviation: Unit: P cd Candela Illuminance Illuminance describes the quantity of luminous flux falling on a surface.Luminous intensity The luminous intensity describes the quantity of light that is radiated in a particular direction. It decreases by the square of the distance (inverse square law).

vertical or inclined plane. 300 lx to 500 lx).g. then the whole room or a specific working area is used to define it. ʳ m: value that the illuminance Illuminance maintenance value E level must not fall below in the visual task area. See also Chapter 8 / 22 on “Economic efficiency calculation”. The maintenance schedule (the cleaning and maintenance intervals for the lamps and installation) must be documented.Traditional quality characteristics of lighting The right light – traditional and new quality criteria T R A D I T I O N A L Harmonious brightness distribution Sufficient illumination level Glare limitation Avoidance of reflections Good modelling Correct light colour Appropriate colour rendition Quality criteria Changing lighting situations Personal control Energy efficiency Daylight integration Light as an interior design element N E W Illuminance – definition of terminology Each term corresponds to the new European standards (see Chapter 2 / 2). and can be determined on a case-by-case basis. The visual task area may be a horizontal. luminaires and room surfaces in the installation. The maintenance factor accounts for the reduction in luminous flux from lamps. Visual task area: illuminance levels are specified for specific visual tasks and are designed for the area in which these may take place. Area immediately surrounding the visual task area: here illuminance may be one level lower than in the visual task area (e. Maintenance factor: the initial value multiplied by the maintenance factor gives the illuminance maintenance value. If the precise location is not known. 6 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook .

Relative illuminance (%) 150 125 100 75 50 25 maintenance value initial value operating time Maintenance value = maintenance factor x initial value Glare – glare limitation Direct glare Reflected glare – luminaires without glare control – very bright surfaces – loss of concentration – more frequent mistakes – fatigue The Lighting Handbook – reflective surfaces – incorrect luminaire arrangement – incorrect workstation position – loss of concentration – more frequent mistakes – fatigue – matching luminaire to workstation (layout) – indirect lighting – matt surfaces remedy – luminaires with limited luminance levels – blinds effect cause Chapter 1 / 7 .

nw = intermediate.300 K 3. tw = cool white The light colour sets the underlying mood of the room! Colour rendition Colour rendition index Ra ≥ 90 80–89 70–79 60–69 40–59 20–39 Daylight Incandescent lamp Compact fluorescent lamp Fluorescent lamp Mercury vapour highpressure lamp Metal halide lamp Sodium vapour highpressure lamp Application examples (minimum requirements for Ra): Ra ≥ 90: colour inspection Ra 80 –89: offices Ra 70 –79: electronics industry Ra 60– 69: assembly work Ra 40– 59: fabrication shop Ra 20– 39: warehouses Display format on fluorescent lamps Example 840: 8 Ra ≥ 80 Colour temperature 4.000 K (nw) The Lighting Handbook 40 8 / Chapter 1 .300 K reddish white blue-ish Association warm intermediate cool Ww = warm white. Colour temperature Appearance ww nw tw up to 3.300 K above 5.300 K – 5.Light colour The light colour describes the colour appearance of the light.

approx.75 m. burnt-in lamps (discharge lamps 100 h) Measuring grid and measuring level – workplaces = 0. car parks (floor) = 0.03 m – cylindrical illuminance = 1. sports facilities (floor) = 0.2 m 0. stairs.2 m – measuring grid: congruent triangles. tolerance 3% – A: high precision. Measuring instruments: description and precision – L: maximum precision. tolerance 5% – B: average precision.5 m 1.0 m The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 / 9 . 1 m distance – measuring grid not congruent with arrangement grid Size of measuring field 1m 5m 10 m 50 m 100 m Grid element spacing 0.0 m 5. under precisely specified conditions. tolerance 10% (minimum requirement) Measuring conditions – avoid external light/daylight (measure separately and subtract) – check mains voltage and ambient temperature – use new.Measuring illuminance Mean illuminance is the arithmetic mean of the point brilliance levels measured with a luxmeter in a defined grid.03 m – circulation areas.0 m 3.

The two methods – the one set out in DIN 5035 and the one defined in EN 12464 – produce comparable results. UGR tables derived from this formula are provided by the manufacturers for glare rating. training. that must not be exceeded: ≤ 16 ≤ 19 ≤ 22 ≤ 25 ≤ 28 Technical drawing Reading. The Quickplan tables in Chapter 6 and the lighting catalogues contain reference values for specific room sizes.Lighting technology Under the new European standard for interior workplace lighting. It takes account of all the luminaires in a system contributing to the sensation of glare. (psychological) glare is assessed by the unified glare rating method (UGR). meetings. writing. EN 12464. UGR limits (UGRL).25 Lb (1) ( ⌺ LP⍀ 2 2 (2) ) The UGR method takes account of all the luminaires in the system that contribute to the glare sensation (2) as well as the brightness of walls and ceilings (1). foyers 10 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . computer-based work Craft and light industries Heavy industry Railway platforms. It produces a UGR index. which is based on a formula for glare. UGR = 8 log 0.

The new European standard sets UGR = 19 as the maximum permissible value for offices.Quality class for nominal illuminance (lx) 1000 750 500 <300 A 1 2000 1500 1000 750 500 <300 2 2000 1000 500 <300 3 2000 1000 500 <300 25 28 22 8 6 4 3 2 a hs 1 55° A 13 UGRL 85° 75° 65° ␥ = 45° The Lighting Handbook The previously used luminance limiting curve method defined in DIN 5035 assesses the mean luminance of the luminaires across a beam angle of 45° to 85°. Chapter 1 / 11 ␥ = 85° ␥ 45° 8 103 2 3 4 5 6 8 104 2 Luminance L in cd/m2 16 19 3 4 . which is equivalent to the luminance limiting curve for 500 lx in Quality class 1.

Types of lighting Direct lighting: – highly directional – strong glare reduction at certain angles – dark ceiling (cave effect) – limited flexibility of workstation layout – energy-efficient Indirect lighting: – diffuse lighting conditions – room gains in height – glare-free – workstations can be positioned anywhere – low energy efficiency 12 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook .

Indirect/direct lighting: – pleasant room impression – high user acceptance – good contrast ratios – flexible workstation layout (indirect component > 60 %) Mellow Light: – indirect/direct solution for low ceiling heights – workstations can be positioned anywhere – glare-free – reduced luminance levels at all viewing angles – gives impression of daylight in room The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 / 13 .

14 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . control of glare and reflections. Savings can be further increased by using daylight-based lighting management and presence detectors. The quantity and quality of light can now be specified exactly for any task area (see Chapter 2 / 2). The funds saved can be used to improve comfort and enhance the room atmosphere. At the same time they offer financial scope that can be used to improve lighting comfort and enhance the room effect. Optimum energy efficiency Large buildings provide huge potential for optimisation of energy consumption. Visual function TASK AREA lighting concepts provide the right quantity of light of the best possible quality for every visual task. as provided for in the EN 12464 standard. Lighting that is consistently focussed onto individual task areas reduces mean illuminance levels and therefore the average expenditure on energy. good contrast rendition and shadow detail are consistently matched to the respective task. Emotional and biological effects Focusing the lighting onto clearly defined areas means saving investment and operating costs. for instance by exciting lighting accents. illuminated walls or dynamic lighting scenarios.Lighting concepts The definition of individual visual tasks for the purpose of lighting design in a room. Uniformity. opens up new perspectives for lighting design. TASK AREA lighting concepts are a customised tool to fully exploit the additional options provided. The lighting is not based on the room but perfectly adjusted to people’s needs.

Chapter 1 / 15 . The position of the workstation is not defined. dynamic lighting situations can enhance their visual quality. the entire room disposes of a uniform lighting quality. rooms can be designed to be much more open and attractive. By illuminating walls. for instance.Room-related lighting concepts take neither individual task areas nor different visual tasks into account. They are based on the most demanding task performed in the room. The Lighting Handbook Lighting focussed onto individual visual task areas provides for varied light design in the room.

The outermost line in the graph indicates optimum fulfilment of a criterion. 16 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . the lighting quality indicator. Visual performance A E Empowerment B Vista D Vitality C Visual comfort Example of ELI assessment using a spider chart. assesses the economic and ecological aspects of light. Checklists are used to record the individual criteria. LENI. the energy efficiency indicator. takes their physical and psychological effects on people into account.Humanergy Balance Human aspects + energy efficiency = Humanergy Balance The Humanergy Balance concept harmonises both aspects of lighting and makes it possible to assess them: ELI. which are displayed in a Kiviat graph (spider chart). Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) The Ergonomic Lighting Indicator (ELI) allows to assess lighting quality in terms of quantity. using five descriptive quality criteria.

Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. Light can provide guidance and make people accept the interior on account of the first visual impression they get. light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. for example. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.Visual performance Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that a visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. but also for perception in the room. – Lighting level – Uniformity of illuminance – Colour rendition – Avoiding hard shadows – Contrast rendition – Physiological glare Vista In prestigious buildings. – Architectural design – Mental design – Guidance – Hierarchy of perception – External appearance – Material – Luminaires’ protection type – Protection against harmful radiation Visual comfort Light is not only needed in the visual task area. – Balanced brightness distribution – Varying luminance levels – Plasticity/modelling – Discomfort glare – Uniform illuminance in area around visual task – Sense of security – Artificial light complemented by daylight – Use of flicker-free ballasts The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 / 17 .

visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes. 18 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs.Vitality Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of wellbeing. Moreover. – Individual influence by switching and dimming – Choice of lighting scene – Presence detection – Daylight-based control – Choice of lighting scenarios – Flexibility for layout changes – Privacy Use of the charts is described in Chapter 8 / 3–10 “Checklists”. – Sense of well-being – Activation and stimulation – Circadian rhythm – Lighting similar to daylight – Avoiding danger spots – Avoiding thermal radiation – Electromagnetic fields Empowerment Varying visual requirements.

the following relevant factors are identified: LENI = – the installed load (Pn) – multiplied by the annual hours of use by day (tD) and at night (tN) – reduced by factors (” 1) for daylight-based control (FD).Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI) The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) stands for a lighting installation’s actual energy consumption in kWh per square metre and year. presence-based control (FO) and use of a lighting control system (FC) – the area assessed (A) LENI also takes charging energy for emergency lighting and standby energy into account. Formula for calculating a lighting installation’s energy consumption: {-(Pn x FC) x {(tD x FO x FD) + (tN x FO)} kWh/(year x m2) A Without elaborating on individual parameters in greater detail. LENI is calculated according to the normative specifications of the EN 15193 standard. The following factors have a positive impact on the reduction of energy consumption: – Sensible control of lighting – Use of daylight – Use of presence detectors – Intelligent consideration of hours of use – Energy-efficient lamps – Need-based use of luminaires and lighting solutions. specified for the respective application – Constant lighting control (maintenance control) 60 The Lighting Handbook 120 0 Energy consumption in kWh/(m2 year) 180 Chapter 1 / 19 .

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . Places of public assembly . . . . . . . Sports facilities . . . . . . . . . . . General circulation areas . . . . . . . . . . . Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retail premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electricity. . . . . . . . . . Fuel filling service stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Railway and tramways . . Airports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saw mills . . . . . . . Parking areas . . Offices . 2 3 – 12 3 3–7 7 8 8 8–9 9 – 10 11 11 – 12 13 – 15 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 – 15 15 . . . . . . . . . . . gas and heat plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petrochemical and other hazardous industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial sites and storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Educational premises. . . . . . . . .Chapter 2 Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor workplaces. . . . . . . . Health care premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial activities and crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor workplaces . Transportational areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building sites. .

Swiss lighting standard SLG 8912. The Lighting Handbook . EN 12193 (April 2008) (see also “Definition of terminology”.75 m area use r flo or-a rea 1. EN 12464-2 (October 2007) “Sports facility lighting”.00 m The maintenance factors can be determined on a case-by-case basis from the manufacturer’s data (see also Chapter 8).g. EN 12464 specifies that the lighting designer must document the maintenance factor and maintenance schedule. DIN 5035. Where no individual maintenance data is available. If the precise location is not known. Chapter 1 / 6) ʳ m maintenance Illuminance levels must not fall below the E values in the visual task area. UGRL is the upper limit for direct glare. Ra is the lower limit for the colour rendition index. The maintenance factors and schedules for Zumtobel luminaires are given in the Quickplan tables (Chapter 6). The Ra of the selected lamp must be equal to or greater than this value.Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting ʳ m gives the illuminance maintenance values specified in the E European standards which partially or completely replace national standards (e.50 in very dirty environments. The UGR value calculated in the design process must lie below this (the Quickplan tables give the UGR figure for the luminaire used in a medium-size reference room). EN 12464-1 (April 2003) “Lighting of outdoorwork places”. Austrian standard O 1040. the limit should be applied to the whole room or a specific working area.67 in a clean atmosphere. DIN 67526). Example for an office task area: task height = 0. “Lighting of indoor workplaces”. and 0. the following values are recommended as reference maintenance factors for modern technology and three-yearly maintenance: 0.

tiles. washrooms. manufacture of glass instruments 200 50 200 200 300 500 50 200 300 300 50 300 300 750 25 – 25 25 22 22 28 28 25 25 28 25 25 19 80 40 80 80 80 80 20 40 80 80 20 80 80 80 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 3 . decorating Cement. cement goods. concrete. post room. calving stalls • Feed preparation. glazing. shaping simple parts. pantries • Rest rooms • Rooms for physical exercise • Cloakrooms. glass. escalators. engraving. glass blowing • Grinding. switch gear rooms • Telex. glassware • Drying • Preparation. shaping precision parts. pressing. glass polishing. rolling. general machine work • Enamelling.Type of interior. switchboard Store rooms. dairy. travolators • Loading ramps/bays Rest. work on kilns and mixers • General machine work • Rough forms Ceramics. handling equipment and machinery • Buildings for livestock • Sick animal pens. toilets • Sick bay • Rooms for medical attention Control rooms • Plant rooms. utensil washing Bakeries • Preparation and baking • Finishing. bathrooms. sanitation and first aid rooms • Canteens. cold stores • Store and stockrooms • Dispatch packing handling areas Storage rack areas • Gangways: unmanned • Gangways: manned • Control stations 100 150 150 200 100 300 200 500 500 200 500 100 300 20 150 150 28 25 25 22 22 22 25 19 16 25 19 25 25 – 22 22 40 40 40 80 80 80 80 80 90 60 80 60 60 40 60 60 Industrial activities and crafts Agriculture • Loading and operating of goods. glazing. task or activity Em UGRL Ra Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings Traffic zones • Circulation areas and corridors • Stairs. bricks • Drying • Preparation of materials.

laboratories • Pharmaceutical production • Tyre production • Colour inspection • Cutting.g. measuring equipment • Electronic workshops.g.g.Type of interior. large transformers – medium e.g. inspection Electrical industry • Cable and wire manufacture • Winding: – large coils – medium-sized coils – small coils • Coil impregnating • Galvanising • Assembly work: – rough e. switchboards – fine e. peeling – cooking in preserve and chocolate factories – work places and zones in sugar factories – for drying and fermenting raw tobacco. decorative grinding. hand grinding and engraving • Precision work e. kitchen work. fermentation cellar • Sorting and washing of products. telephones – precision e. sieving. adjusting Food stuffs and luxury food industry • Work places and zones in – breweries. task or activity • Grinding of optical glass. testing. milling. packing • Work places and critical zones in slaughter houses. mixing. manufacture of cigars and cigarettes Em UGRL Ra 750 1000 1500 50 150 300 500 500 500 1000 750 300 300 500 750 300 300 300 500 750 1000 1500 16 16 16 – 28 25 19 22 22 16 19 25 25 22 19 25 25 25 22 19 16 16 80 90 90 20 40 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 200 300 500 300 500 25 25 25 25 22 80 80 80 80 80 4 / Chapter 2 The Lighting Handbook . on filtering floor in sugar refineries • Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables • Manufacture of delicatessen foods. butchers. crystal. malting floor – for washing. dairies mills. cleaning.g. plastics and rubber industry • Remote-operated processing installations • Processing installations with limited manual intervention • Constantly manned work places in processing installations • Precision measuring rooms. finishing. hand painting • Manufacture of synthetic precious stones Chemical. barrel filling.

pressing • Inspection and repairs Leather and leather goods • Work on vats. • Platforms • Sand preparation • Dressing room • Work places at cupola and mixer • Casting bay • Shake out areas • Machine moulding • Hand and core moulding • Die casting • Model building Hairdressers • Hairdressing Jewellery manufacturing • Working with precious stones • Manufacture of jewellery • Watch making (manual) • Watch making (automatic) Laundries and dry cleaning • Goods in. cutting.1 mm • Scribing. rubbing. trimming. decoration • Laboratories • Colour inspection Foundries and metal casting • Man-size underfloor tunnels. inspection Em UGRL Ra 500 500 1000 50 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 300 300 500 500 1500 1000 1500 500 300 300 300 750 200 300 500 500 500 1000 1000 500 500 200 300 300 300 500 750 22 19 16 – 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 22 19 16 16 16 19 25 25 25 19 25 25 22 22 22 19 16 22 22 25 25 25 22 19 19 80 80 90 20 40 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 90 90 90 80 80 80 80 80 80 40 80 80 90 80 80 90 80 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 5 . task or activity • Inspection of glasses and bottles. grinding: tolerances < 0. polishing.1 mm • Precision machining. sewing. shaping. tumbling of skins • Saddlery work. sorting. cellars. pits • Fleshing. barrels. shoe manufacture: stitching. marking and sorting • Washing and dry cleaning • Ironing. punching • Sorting • Leather dyeing (machine) • Quality control • Colour inspection • Shoe making • Glove making Metal working and processing • Open die forging • Drop forging • Welding • Rough and average machining: tolerances ≥ 0.Type of interior. skiving. product control. etc.

printing machines. coiler. measurement and inspection 500 • Underfloor man-sized tunnels. paper and corrugating machines. pulp mills 200 • Paper manufacture and processing. cellars etc.. embossing. sorting. cardboard manufacture 300 • Standard bookbinding work. 50 19 19 19 16 16 – 28 25 – 25 25 22 22 80 80 80 90 80 20 40 80 20 20 40 80 80 .g. cold forming 300 • Plate machining: thickness ≥ 5 mm 200 • Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5 mm 300 • Tool making. condenser rooms etc. precision mechanics. cutting. sewing 500 Power stations • Fuel supply plant 50 • Boiler house 100 • Machine halls 200 • Side rooms. e. folding. switchboards (inside buildings) 200 • Control rooms 500 • Outdoor switch gear 20 Printers • Cutting. gilding. lithography 1000 • Colour inspection in multicoloured printing 1500 • Steel and copper engraving 2000 Rolling mills. belt sections. work on stones and platens. retouching. shear line 300 • Control platforms. pump rooms. e. gluing. iron and steel works • Production plants without manual operation 50 • Production plants with occasional manual operation 150 • Production plants with continuous manual operation 200 • Slab Store 50 • Furnaces 200 • Mill train. matrix making 500 • Paper sorting and hand printing 500 • Type setting. micromechanics 1000 Paper and paper goods • Edge runners. template and jig making. control panels 300 • Test. cutting equipment manufacture 750 • Assembly: – rough 200 – medium 300 – fine 500 – precision 750 • Galvanising 300 • Surface preparation and painting 750 • Tool.g.Type of interior. task or activity Em UGRL 25 25 22 19 25 25 22 19 25 25 19 25 25 22 – 28 25 25 16 – Ra 60 60 60 60 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 20 40 80 60 80 20 – 20 6 / Chapter 2 The Lighting Handbook • Wire and pipe drawing shops. embossing. block engraving.

• Writing. fluting. inspection 1000 • Upholstery manufacture (manned) 1000 • Final inspection 1000 Wood working and processing • Automatic processing e. sizing. devilling machine work.g. task or activity Em UGRL Ra Textile manufacture and processing • Work places and zones in baths. winding 500 • Warping. data processing • Technical drawing • CAD work stations • Conference and meeting rooms • Reception desk • Archives 300 500 750 500 500 300 200 19 19 16 19 19 22 25 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 7 . trimming 1000 • Colour inspection. drawing patterns 750 • Finishing. plywood manufacturing 50 • Steam pits 150 • Saw frame 300 • Work at joiner’s bench. rebating. reeling. taking up stitches 750 • Manual design. jute and hemp spinning 300 • Spinning. drying.g. pre-spinning. sinking 500 • Selection of veneer woods 750 • Marquetry. fine knitting. grooving. polishing chamber 750 • Painting: touch-up. inspection 1000 25 22 22 22 22 22 22 28 25 19 16 19 22 22 22 19 19 19 60 80 80 80 80 90 80 60 80 80 90 90 80 80 80 90 80 80 28 28 25 25 22 19 22 22 19 40 40 60 80 80 80 90 90 90 Offices Offices • Filing. assembly 300 • Polishing. dressing. weaving. plying. fabric control 1000 • Invisible mending 1500 • Hat manufacturing 500 Vehicle construction • Body work and assembly 500 • Painting. dyeing 500 • Drying room 100 • Automatic fabric printing 500 • Burling. etc. reading. drawing. cutting. bale opening 200 • Carding. spraying chamber. picking. ironing. gluing. washing. card cutting. turning. typing. sawing. braiding. copying. painting. combing. inlay work 750 • Quality control. fancy joinery 750 • Work on wood working machines e. knitting 500 • Sewing.Type of interior.

dressing rooms Trade fairs. porters desk • Kitchen • Restaurant. function room • Self-service restaurant • Buffet • Conference rooms • Corridors Theatres. play school • Play room • Nursery • Handicraft room Educational buildings • Classrooms. exhibition halls • General lighting Museums • Exhibits. task or activity Em UGRL Ra Retail premises Retail premises • Sales area • Till area • Wrapper table 300 500 500 22 19 19 80 80 80 Places of public assembly General areas • Entrance halls • Cloakrooms • Lounges • Ticket offices Restaurants and hotels • Reception/cashier desk. tutorial rooms • Classroom for evening classes and adults education 300 300 300 300 500 19 19 19 19 19 80 80 80 80 80 The Lighting Handbook 8 / Chapter 2 . concert halls.Type of interior. dining room. insensitive to light • Light sensitive exhibits Libraries • Bookshelves • Reading area • Counters Public car parks (indoor) • In/out ramps (during the day) • In/out ramps (at night) • Traffic lanes • Parking areas • Ticket office 100 200 200 300 300 500 – 200 300 500 100 300 300 22 25 22 22 22 22 – 22 22 19 25 22 22 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 according to requirements 200 500 500 300 75 75 75 300 19 19 19 25 25 25 – 19 80 80 80 20 20 20 20 80 Educational premises Nursery school. cinemas • Practice rooms.

task or activity • Lecture hall • Black board • Demonstration table • Art rooms • Art rooms in art schools • Technical drawing rooms • Practical rooms and laboratories • Handicraft rooms • Teaching workshop • Music practice rooms • Computer practice rooms (menu driven) • Language laboratory • Preparation rooms and workshops • Entrance halls • Circulation areas. gymnasiums. maternity wards • General lighting • Reading lighting • Simple examinations • Examination and treatment • Night lighting. swimming pools (general use) • School canteens • Kitchen Em 500 500 500 500 750 750 500 500 500 300 300 300 500 200 100 150 200 300 200 500 100 300 200 500 UGRL 19 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 19 19 22 22 25 25 22 19 19 19 25 22 22 22 Ra 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 Health care premises Rooms for general use • Waiting rooms • Corridors: during the day • Corridors: during the night • Day rooms Staff rooms • Staff office • Staff rooms Wards. observation lighting • Bathrooms and toilets for patients Examination rooms (general) • General lighting • Examination and treatment Eye examination rooms • General lighting • Examination of the outer eye 200 200 50 200 500 300 100 300 300 1000 5 200 500 1000 300 1000 22 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 – 22 19 19 19 – 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 90 90 80 90 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 9 .Type of interior. corridors • Stairs • Student common rooms and assembly halls • Teachers rooms • Library: bookshelves • Library: reading areas • Stock rooms for teaching materials • Sports halls.

task or activity • Reading and colour vision tests with vision charts Ear examination rooms • General lighting • Ear examination Scanner rooms • General lighting • Scanners with image enhancers and television systems Delivery rooms • General lighting • Examination and treatment Treatment rooms (general) • Dialysis • Dermatology • Endoscopy rooms • Plaster rooms • Medical baths • Massage and radiotherapy Operating areas • Pre-op and recovery rooms • Operating theatre • Operating cavity Intensive care unit • General lighting • Simple examinations • Examination and treatment • Night watch Dentists • General lighting • At the patient • Operating cavity • White teeth matching Laboratories and pharmacies • General lighting • Colour inspection Decontamination rooms • Sterilisation rooms • Disinfection rooms Autopsy rooms and mortuaries • General lighting • Autopsy table and dissecting table Em UGRL Ra 500 300 1000 300 50 300 1000 500 500 300 500 300 300 500 1000 16 19 – 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 90 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 90 90 100 300 1000 20 500 1000 5000 5000 500 1000 300 300 500 5000 19 19 19 19 19 – – – 19 19 22 22 19 – 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 80 90 80 80 90 90 The Lighting Handbook 10 / Chapter 2 .Type of interior.

escalators.Type of interior. travolators • Information desks. usually an UGRL level of 22 should be observed • Aerobics 500 • Archery 200 • Athletics (all disciplines) 500 • Badminton 750 • Basketball 750 • Billards 750 • Boccia 300 • Boules 300 • Bowling 200 • Bowls 500 • Boxing (competition/training) 2000/300 • Climbing 500 • Cricket 750 • Cricket nets 1500 • Curling (target/playing area) 300/200 • Cycling 750 • Dancing (fitness) 500 • Darts 200 The Lighting Handbook 60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 Chapter 2 / 11 . check-in desks • Customs and passport control desks • Waiting areas • Luggage store rooms • Security check areas • Air traffic control tower • Testing and repair hangars • Engine test areas • Measuring areas in hangars Railway installations • Covered platforms and passenger subways (underpasses) • Ticket hall and concourse • Ticket and luggage offices and counters • Waiting rooms 200 150 500 500 200 200 300 500 500 500 500 22 22 19 19 22 25 19 16 22 22 22 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 200 300 200 28 28 19 22 40 40 80 80 Sports facilities The following details apply to competition class I (lower requirements apply to classes II and III) Em and Ra data according to European Standard EN 12193 General school sports data from EN 12464 An Ra level of 80 should be preferred For lighting for training purposes. task or activity Em UGRL Ra Transportational areas Airports • Arrival and departure halls. baggage claim areas • Connecting areas.

Type of interior. task or activity • Fencing • Football (indoor) • Gymnastics • Handball • Hockey • Ice hockey • Ice skating • Judo • Kendo/Karate • Netball • Petanque • Racketball • Riding • Roller skating • School sports • Shooting • Snooker • Speed skating • Squash • Swimming • Swimmung (school level) • Table tennis • Tennis • Volleyball • Weight lifting • Wrestling Em 750 750 500 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 300 750 500 500 750 200 750 500 750 300 500 750 750 750 750 750 Ra 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 12 / Chapter 2 The Lighting Handbook .

demanding electrical.Type of area. machine and pipe mountings Fuel filling stations • Vehicle parking and storage areas • Entry and exit driveways: dark environment (i. wooden mould and framework mounting. excavation and loading • Construction areas. drain pipes mounting. machine and piping installations. loading and unloading of solid bulk goods • Continuous handling of large units and raw materials. ordinary reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants • Demanding electrical. auxiliary and storage tasks • Framework element mounting. 40 km/h) • Pedestrian passages. e. covered loading platforms. electric piping and cabling • Element jointing. (10 km/h). cities) • Air pressure and water checking points and other service areas • Meter reading area Industrial sites and storage areas • Short term handling of large units and raw materials. trucks and excavators • Regular vehicle traffic (max.e. transport. light reinforcement work. loading and unloading points 5 10 20 50 20 30 50 50 200 20 50 100 200 5 20 50 150 150 20 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 60 20 20 40 40 20 20 20 20 20 Airports • Hangar apron • Terminal apron • Loading areas • Fuel depot • Aircraft maintenance stands Building sites • Clearance. inspection 20 50 100 200 20 20 20 60 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 13 . task or activity Em UGRL Ra General circulation areas at outdoor workplaces • Walkways exclusively for pedestrians • Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles max. rural areas and suburbs) • Entry and exit driveways: light environment (i.e.g. loading and unloading of freight. lifting and descending location for cranes. bicycles. vehicle turning. use of tools. open loading platforms • Reading of addresses.

small number of passengers 15 • Walkways 20 • Level crossings 20 • Open platforms. continuous operation 20 • Open platforms in freight areas 20 • Servicing trains and locomotives 20 • Railway yards handling areas 30 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 20 14 / Chapter 2 The Lighting Handbook . lighting of burners • Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with risk free substances. e. tramways. electricity. including stabling 10 • Railway yards: flat marshalling. starting and stopping motors. plants. churches.g. sports and multipurpose building complexes • Heavy traffic. miniature rails.Type of area. retarder and classification yards 10 • Hump areas 10 • Freight track. monorails. e. replacements of pump packing. rural and local trains. parking areas of schools. etc. office buildings. major shopping centres. metro. reading of instruments • Fuel loading and unloading sites • Repair of machines and electric devices 20 50 100 100 200 5 20 50 100 100 200 20 20 40 20 60 20 20 20 40 40 60 Power. piping and packing • Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances. coal • Overall inspection • General servicing work and reading of instruments • Wind tunnels: servicing and maintenance • Repair of electric devices Railways and tramways Railway areas including light railways. e. parking areas of shops.g. gas and heat plants • Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas • Handling of servicing tools. • Tracks in passenger station areas. cycle parks • Medium traffic.g. parking areas of department stores. inspection of leakage. major sports and multipurpose building complexes 5 10 50 20 20 20 Petrochemical and other hazardous industries • Handling of servicing tools. task or activity Em Ra Parking areas • Light traffic. suburban and regional trains with large number of passengers or inter-city services with small number of passengers 20 • Freight track. short duration operations 10 • Open platforms. utilisation of manually regulated valves. general service work. terraced and apartment houses.

Heinestrasse 38 Ordering of standards and products. inter-city services • Covered platforms. continuous operation • Inspection pit Em 30 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 Ra 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 40 40 Saw mills • Timber handling on land and in water. sawdust and chip conveyors • Sorting of timber on land or in water.on-norm. A-1020 Vienna. small and medium-size stations • Open platforms. large stations • Covered platforms in freight areas. task or activity • Coupling area • Stairs. stacking • Reading of addresses and markings of sawn timber • Grading and packaging • Feeding into stripping and chopping machines 20 50 100 200 300 20 20 40 40 40 Extracts from Austrian Standard (ÖNORM) EN 12464-1 Light and lighting – lighting of workplaces – Part 1: indoor workplaces (2003-04-01) Austrian Standard (ÖNORM) EN 12464-2 Light and lighting – lighting of workplaces – Part 2: outdoor workplaces (2007-10-01) Austrian Standard (ÖNORM EN 12193) Light and lighting – sports facility lighting (2008-04-01) The Lighting Handbook published with permission by the Austrian Standards Institute. short duration operations • Covered platforms. inter-city services • Stairs. mechanical lifting to timber conveyor.at Chapter 2 / 15 .Type of area. as well as research on the subject at www. timber unloading points and sawn timber loading points. suburban or regional trains or inter-city services with small number of passengers • Covered platforms in freight areas.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free-standing uplights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELISSA. . . . . . . . . . . SOLINA . . . . . . . . . VIVO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS range . . . . . . . . . . BELIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5 6–9 10 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 17 18 – 23 24 – 25 26 27 – 28 29 30 – 31 32 – 33 34 – 35 36 – 37 38 – 39 40 – 41 42 – 43 44 – 45 46 – 47 48 – 49 50 – 57 58 – 59 60 – 61 62 – 63 64 – 67 68 – 69 70 – 71 72 – 73 74 – 75 76 – 77 78 – 85 86 – 87 88 – 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TETTOIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS M/MWW . . . RTX II . SYSTEMLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCUBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON . . . . . VIVO-S + VIVO-SL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS L and H. . . . . Spots and tracks (SOLAR II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN . . . . VAERO . CARDAN-SPIRIT . . . STARFLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 3 Products (selection) ZUMTOBEL applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ONLITE/ONLITE RESCLITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHTTOOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS S and Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIELOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II . . . PASO II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERLUCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZBOX . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL T16 . . .

.

Offices and Communication Spatial structures and lighting systems must be adapted to new types of work. improve awareness and create social understanding: dynamic lighting solutions with optimum colour properties enhance people’s concentration and improve visual comfort in educational facilities.Areas of application Throughout the world.zumtobel. the greatest demands are placed on the flexibility. ZUMTOBEL is the competent reliable partner for innovative lighting solutions in all areas of application of professional interior lighting – providing global competence. Industry and Engineering In production. The right light in manufacturing and assembly bays as well as warehouses and workshops is the basis for any productive work. What is required are flexible people. functionality and building management system of industrial buildings. Education and Science Using light to enhance communication. superior product quality and futureproof technologies. www. flexible architecture and flexible light which enhances communication and motivation and improves the quality of working and spending time at the office.com/applications Chapter 3 / 3 The Lighting Handbook .

Art and Culture Where the highest architectural requirements must be met. supports the accomplishment of visual tasks in different therapies and examination procedures. Hotel and Wellness Those who collect stars for their restaurant or hotel should not only work on their recipes. makes orientation easier and ensures safety in circulation areas – in hospitals. sanatoriums and retirement homes. creates a living-room ambience. 4 / Chapter 3 www.Presentation and Retail Modern retail worlds must provide a quality of experience. The guests’ pleasure starts with the lighting that stimulates all senses. accentuating factor of experience. Health and Care Light increases the patients’ sense of wellbeing.com/applications The Lighting Handbook . their design becomes an expression of the brand message.zumtobel. Customised lighting solutions are an essential element of these worlds of experience. ever greater demands are also made on the element without which room impression and artistic delight are inconceivable: light as a modulating.

Optimum lighting has to ensure the safety of athletes and the best possible viewing conditions for those performing. special requirements must be met in terms of lighting. Transit Areas and Parking Light is ideal to bring a more pleasant touch to utility buildings.zumtobel.com/applications Chapter 3 / 5 . Orientation and Safety Lighting provides safety and ensures (self-)reliability: escape sign luminaires in a sophisticated design.Sport and Leisure For each type of sport. the audience and the referees. and emergency lighting systems as an integral concept including the lighting management and service systems. Leaving one’s car in a safely lit car park not only ensures that the paintwork will not be scratched but also that the driver will have a good feeling. The Lighting Handbook www.

independent of power supply – for each track. suspension from cord or pendant tube – tracks can be bent to specific radii. up to 64 DALI spots can be separately controlled – impressive. tracks and continuous row lighting systems are vital components providing the basis for active light design.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook In lighting technology. Using DALI. A fascinating interplay of dramatic brightness variations can be staged.Spots and tracks – An unbeatable team 3-phase track – high professionalism due to variety of switching options – broad range of connectors for any type of track configuration – track can be easily installed on ceiling or wall. impressive lighting scenarios can be created. . while spotlights fitted with colour filters allow to set the stage for pleasant choreographies of coloured light. exception: tracks with supporting section – acceptable: tracks used within manual reach DALI track – 3-phase track with built-in control lines for tapping DALI control signals – spotlights with DALI control gear can be individually dimmed and switched at zero power. dynamic shows and lighting sequences can be run in combination with the EMOTION touch panel by ZUMTOBEL 6 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.

and appropriate DALI adapters for easy integration with digital lighting management systems The Lighting Handbook www.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 7 .SOLAR II – New generation – flowing lines. designed as interchangeable reflectors Benefits: – safe. fitted with electronic control gear only for use with state-of-the-art lamp technology: Pros: – universal 3-phase adapter by ZUMTOBEL – new generation of reflectors with four different beam angles. extends service life of lamps – installation on DALI tracks with DALI transformer. convenient operation thanks to ZUMTOBEL’s new universal 3-phase adapter – can be quickly adjusted to changing lighting tasks using a wide range of interchangeable reflectors – low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps up to 100 W – metal halide lamps 20 W to 70 W – wide range of accessories that can be combined – organic design – AFPS (AirFlow Protection System): increases reliability of electronic ballasts. organic design Application: A generation of expressive spotlights with soft and flowing lines for accent and display lighting in – shops & display windows – galleries & showrooms – private settings Design by Massimo Iosa Ghini Models: – Spotlight system in two design sizes. in die-cast aluminium.zumtobel. titanium or white.

also for lighting foodstuffs Pros: – interchangeable reflectors – integral ball-and-socket joint – universal 3-phase adapter by ZUMTOBEL Benefits: – can be quickly adjusted to changing lighting tasks using a wide range of interchangeable reflectors – safe. made of diecast aluminium. microstructure paint. A real all-rounder for – shops.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook – bayonet joint ensures minimum maintenance of lamps and easy replacement of reflectors and accessories – installation on DALI tracks with DALI transformer. convenient operation thanks to ZUMTOBEL’s new universal 3-phase adapter – intuitive. Fitted with electronic control gear only for use with stateof-the-art lamp technology: Design by EOOS – low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps up to 100 W – metal halide lamps 20 W to 150 W – high-pressure sodium discharge lamps up to 100 W – wide range of accessories. display windows & retail areas – department stores & supermarkets – galleries & showrooms – private settings Models: – Spotlight system in three design sizes. precise adjustment by means of integral clip – track box fitted parallel to track ensures uncluttered look on ceiling 8 / Chapter 3 www. and appropriate DALI adapters for easy integration with digital lighting management systems .VIVO – Light’s intuitive freedom of movement Application: ZUMTOBEL spotlight range for accent and display lighting. silver or white.

Move and Retain (SMART) system for intuitive alignment Pros for VIVO-SL: – freedom of design.VIVO-S and VIVO-SL – Spotlight system with three hundred and sixty degrees precision Models: – Recessed spotlight.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 9 . also in case of low-profile ceilings – pivots through up to 50° – Squeeze.5 35/70 W and QT 90 W lamps – electronic ballast must be ordered separately Benefits: – complete solution combining ceiling-mounted module and track – highly flexible. spotlight head pivots from position flush with ceiling to 90º – 2 design sizes: round and square Pros for VIVO-S: – pivots through up to 90° – rotates through 360° – pivots to position flush with ceiling – pivots progressively – Squeeze. Move and Retain (SMART) system for intuitive alignment – HIT G8. architecturally consistent lighting concept The Lighting Handbook – VIVO is a real all-rounder mastering every lighting task in shops and stores www.zumtobel.

no flange – assembly of lengths on site – lighting inserts to be installed and shifted without any tools – prepared for operation with DALI (integral bus line) – extremely easy design (optional aid: configurator) – delivery ex warehouse. assembled using 3 sections – luminaire housing made of bent sheet steel – lighting heads made of diecast aluminium – floodlight housing made of extruded aluminium section – electronic control gear (optional: DALI gear) 10 / Chapter 3 www. easy to install. and versatile System range: – lighting channel. no flange – lighting channel. no special lengths required Design by Studio Jean-Michel Wilmotte Material/design: – channel sections in aluminium extrusion.zumtobel. U-shape.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . but with HIT up to 70 W – installed flush with ceiling (plasterboard ceilings). with flange – lighting inserts for various spotlight applications – lighting inserts for floodlighting and wide-area lighting – all lighting inserts can be clicked in and positioned without the use of tools – electrical connection via plugin contact (no tools required) Application: – shops & display windows – foyers & corridor areas – showrooms & galleries – offices & office areas Benefits: – only 100 mm wide. flushmounted.LIGHTTOOLS – Modular lighting system: inconspicuous. ceiling-bearing.

Lamp(s): Spotlight Floodlight Linear – HIT-TC-CE/up to 70 W Spot & Flood – QT-LP 12/90 W Spot & Flood – QR-LP 70/50 W – HIT-CE G12/70 W – HST GX12/100 W – T 16 24 up to 54 W. ensures minimum installation effort The Lighting Handbook Versatility – suitable for all types of ceilings: – without flange for plasterboard ceilings – ceiling-bearing (with flange) for all other ceilings – various different channel looks: – with pivoting lighting heads – with flush lighting heads – as an “open” channel (gap between lighting inserts open) – as a “closed” channel (gaps closed by cover sections) www. DL & WF 3 pros: Current design – reduced to a minimum in material – extremely easy planning in advance.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 11 . as exact definition of lengths not required until on site Easy installation – only few components need to be installed – no additional connectors required – lighting inserts can be fitted without use of tools – building management thanks to DALI integration: – integral bus line in channel as standard – control gear installed optionally – “endless” cable duct up to 25 m. can be clicked in without use of tools.zumtobel.

2 x 45° 12 / Chapter 3 Application: – upmarket shops & shop windows – foyers & corridor areas – showrooms & galleries – entrance & office areas – prestigious private settings Design by Studio Jean-Michel Wilmotte www. separately for each lamp – DALI version (transformers & bus feed line) available if required – RGB model as “stand-alone” version also available upon request . unique design – high illumination output: up to 4 x 70 W HIT – can be fitted with mixed lamps – wide range of technical lighting accessories – DALI-compatible (inc.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook – in lighting frames in particular: – built-in electronic ballasts. RGB colour changes) – can be installed in different locations in a room: – horizontally suspended – vertically suspended – installed on wall/ceiling Lighting technology: – lighting heads for no-tool reflector replacement – silver-colour spot & flood specular reflectors – complete range of accessories for the “Spirit” spotlight range can be used – lighting heads pivot on gimbals through approx.CARDAN-SPIRIT – Modular lighting system: unobtrusive and flexible System range: Ceiling-recessed luminaires – autonomous design according to the SPIRIT spotlight range – fitted with up to 4 x 70 W HIT – extremely flat design of model fitted with QR111 – wide range of technical lighting accessories – easy replacement of reflectors Lighting frame – autonomous.zumtobel.

zumtobel. square – QR 111/100 W (also FLAT) – QT 12/100 W Spot & Flood – HIT-TC-CE 35 + 70 W Spot & Flood – separate ballasts (accessories) Lighting frame – 2-lamp to 4-lamp – QR 111/100 W FLAT – QT 12/100 W Spot & Flood – HIT-TC-CE 35 + 70 W Spot & Flood – electronic ballasts included 3 Pros: Functionality – complete SPIRIT accessories can be fitted – accessories replaced from the front (lamps & reflectors & filters) – ventilation of lighting head ensures optimum thermal conditions Lighting technology – Spirit lighting head as base – power packages: up to 4 x 70 W HIT – can be fitted with mixed lamps – prepared for DALI integration – FLAT version for QR 111 Variety of creative design options – recessed into ceiling – horizontally & vertically suspended – installed on wall & underneath the ceiling The Lighting Handbook www. round – 1-lamp to 4-lamp.Range/lamp(s): Ceiling-recessed luminaires – 1-lamp.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 13 .

Schott Spectraflex) – fibre with terminal light emission (PMMA.zumtobel. DMX) Light outlets – decorative crystal light heads – pivoting surface-mounted and recessed lenses with defined beam angle – IP-protected light outlets for outdoor and underwater applications – projection heads for extremely narrow-beam lighting as well as slide and gobo projections Optical fibre – fibre with terminal light emission (glass. Mitsubishi) Accessories – colour and colour temperature correction filters – colour and sparkle-effect wheel modules – control lines and input units 14 / Chapter 3 www. Mitsubishi) – side-radiating fibre (PMMA.STARFLEX – The modular fibre optic system Fibre optic technology provides fascinating options for precise.com/productsites as well as a variety of accessories allow to create customised lighting solutions for numerous applications. impressive display lighting. controllable (DALI. The Lighting Handbook . 1–10 V. A broad product range including light engines and optical fibres Models: Engines – halogen QR-CBC 50–100 W light engines – HIT 35–250 W light engines – HIT 150/250 W light engines.

Benefits: – precise direction of light – colour temperature can be adjusted to meet special project requirements – broad range of light engines from 35 W to 250 W. for product advertising or visitor information in shops. etc. UV and IR components – projection of logos or slides – modular design for customised project solutions Pros: STARFLEX for presentation and retail – maintenance-friendly and – UV/IR-free lighting of fashion space-saving (e.: at the cinema. display items. wells and ponds viding accents (water film on stainless steel sheets.– precise illumination of ing management solutions display windows and showvia control line of bus syscases tem STARFLEX for art and culture – conservational lighting without UV and IR components – light colour adjusted via corresponding light sources and fibre material – precise narrow-beam illumination with sharp outlines via appropriate outlets STARFLEX for wellness and fitness areas – underwater lighting in swim. for indoor and outdoor areas as well as damp areas – separation of light and electricity. g.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 15 .) STARFLEX projection – Projection e. foodstuffs or cases with alarm system) jewellery/watches – can be integrated with light.– lighting of applications proming pools. museums and galleries based on fibre optics The Lighting Handbook www. g.

54 0.57 0.76 0.93 0.2 mm 615 2.62 0.5 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm 1.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Length-based correction factors (attenuation) for glass fibre cables . display shelving and show cases – starry skies in hotels and wellness areas – outdoor lighting or in areas with high air humidity 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m 9 m 10 m 0.87 0.9 mm 79 6.0 mm Outer diameter Maximum number of sheathing of individual fibres per common end spigot 2.zumtobel.66 0.4 mm 36 8.50 16 / Chapter 3 www.Properties and applications of optical fibres Fibre Properties material Glass – can withstand relatively high temperatures (up to 110 °C) – extremely long service life (in excess of 20 years) – relatively tight bending radius – projects preferring relatively warm light colour PMMA – cheaper than glass – life time in excess of 20 years – projects involving relatively cool light colour – choice of side-radiating or terminal light emitting fibres – side-radiating and terminal light-emitting fibres can be combined in a single fibre bundle – fibre bundle can optionally be assembled on site Assembly of glass fibre bundles Active diameter of fibre cable 1.0 mm 3.71 0.0 mm 4.7 mm 20 Minimum bending radius 7 mm 11 mm 14 mm 21 mm 32 mm 42 mm Applications – glass display cases in museums – saunas and steam baths – hotel and restaurant lighting – applications requiring high levels of illumination – retail shop windows.7 mm 307 3.81 0.9 mm 176 4.

0 mm 6 Maximum number of individual fibres per common end spigot (spliced) 40 10 5 3 The Lighting Handbook www.0 mm 8.5 mm 2.83 0.5 mm 6.zumtobel.65 0.5 mm 37/18 8.0 mm 10.5 mm 13/6 12.5 mm 20/10 10. factory-assembled) Outer diameter Maximum number of of sheathing individual fibres per common end spigot (crimped) 4.2 mm 575/300 2.0 mm 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 24 mm 36 mm 48 mm 60 mm 75 mm Length-based correction factors (attenuation) for PMMA cables 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m 9 m 10 m 0.0 mm 4.79 0.75 0.91 0.0 mm 8/4 Minimum bending radius 1.5 mm 80 8.72 0.0 mm 1.7 mm 342/165 4.Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles (terminal light emission.95 0.0 mm 11 14.0 mm 19 11. factory-assembled) Active diameter of fibre cable Outer diameter Maximum number of sheathing of individual fibres per common end spigot crimped/ spliced 2.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 17 .0 mm 3.0 mm 72/35 6.87 0.62 Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles (side radiation.0 mm 143/70 5.69 0.

shopping arcades 18 / Chapter 3 www. conference rooms. small presentation areas. surfacemounted – unique. high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting – maximum application flexibility thanks to integral pivoting lamp units Application: sales counters. reception areas. corridors. hotels.zumtobel. points of sale. restaurants. reception areas. foyers and all other applications for which surface-mounted luminaires can be used 2LIGHT – unique. high-quality downlight system for wide-area general lighting Application: reception areas. high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting Application: display lighting. restaurants.2LIGHT – High-quality downlight system 2LIGHT MINI – unique. relaxation areas. shelf lighting 2LIGHT MINI. cafeterias. high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting – surface-mounted housing can be installed quickly using CLIX mechanism Application: display lighting. bars. foyers. residential properties 2LIGHT-C MINI (CARDAN) – unique.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . waiting areas. corridors.

presentation areas. museums 2LIGHT MDW (multi-directional wallwasher) – innovative. fully flexible wallwasher reflector technology for brightening up vertical areas Application: corridors. waiting areas. Engel Impressive looks Winner of the 2005 iF Design Award – unobtrusive. restaurants Design by Hartmut S.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 19 .2LIGHT-C (CARDAN) – unique high-quality downlight system for accent lighting – maximum application flexibility thanks to integral pivoting lamp units Application: shops. flat aluminium frame in titanium colour – high-quality printed safety glass panel – unique Mellow Downlight effect The Lighting Handbook www. offices. retail areas. conference rooms.zumtobel.

Benefits: Easiest possible maintenance/easy handling 2LIGHT has a completely closed housing. 2LIGHT is light-tight in the ceiling. Soft. Unique technical lighting features innovative principle of reflector splitting – diffuse light: a special matt-sanded plastic panel behind the safety glass ensures a matched soft light component around the reflector. 20 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel. – direct reflector light: light component directed downwards via facetted reflector.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . At the same time. The unique EasyClean catch enables quick and easy relamping. pleasantly bright light is provided.

zumtobel.Models: 2LIGHT (fixed) 2LIGHT-C (pivots on gimbals) 2LIGHT MDW (multi-directional wallwasher) 2LIGHT MINI single module 2LIGHT MINI double module 2LIGHT MINI triple module 2LIGHT MINI surfacemounted 2LIGHT single module 2LIGHT double module 2LIGHT triple module The Lighting Handbook www.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 21 .

com/productsites 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW double module 408 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 2x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 2x35/70 W .Overview: 22 / Chapter 3 Protection class IP 44 Accessories Colour filter Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Mounting kit for thin ceilings IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 40 IP 44 Colour filter Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher IP 44 Type 2LIGHT MINI 2LIGHT-C MINI Module size 118 x 118 mm Mounting depth Lamp(s) 100 mm CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 75 W 118 x 118 mm 120 mm 256 x 118 mm 103 mm 373 x 118 mm 103 mm 2LIGHT MINI single module 2LIGHT-C MINI double module 2LIGHT-C MINI triple module 2LIGHT MINI Surface-mounted 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW single module 127 x 127 mm x – (height) 175 mm 216 x 216 mm 152 mm LED WN/WW or LED RGB/W new! CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 50 W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 50 W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 75 W TC-TELI 1x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 1x35/70 W The Lighting Handbook www.zumtobel.

The Lighting Handbook 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW triple module 600 x 216 mm 152 mm Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher IP 44 IP 44 2LIGHT-C single module 216 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 1x32/42 W TC-L 1x80 W/2x55 W T-16 3x24 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 3x35/70 W TC-TELI 1x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W www.zumtobel.com/productsites IP 44 Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors IP 44 2LIGHT-C double module 408 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 2x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W 2LIGHT-C triple module 600 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 3x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 3x20/35/70 W Chapter 3 / 23 .

zumtobel.PANOS L and H – Multi-talented downlights PANOS L – recessed depth of just 100 mm – maximum efficiency levels PANOS H – satisfies the most stringent glare limitation requirements without the need for accessories Reflectors and their applications HF/LF The precision-shaped facets provide brilliant effects. reduced luminance levels and optimum efficiency.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook HWW The special ribbed structure of the reflector produces asymmetrical light distribution. . HM/LM Good looks are guaranteed by this matt reflector optic with reduced dust sensitivity. HL/LL The white reflector optic is a perfect match for the decorative accessories. Design by Sottsass Associati 24 / Chapter 3 www. HG/LG Highly specular darklight reflector optic for glare-free working at the highest level. ideal for highlighting vertical surfaces.

/flange unit The reflector/flange unit is installed by means of a “twist and lock mechanism” without any tools. ® new PSP+ surface is already without using technical lighting accessories revealed by its name: Pure Silver Plated+ –100 % silver.PSP+® (Pure Silver Plated+) – brilliant new finish for downlight with silber-plated reflector What is innova– glare control in conformity tive about the with EN 12464 standard.zumtobel. range Benefits: – tremendous light output – light output ratio increased by as much as 21% – increased lighting level leads to reduced maintenance factor – innovative surface stability – extremely durable and ultra-hard reflector surface – excellent maintenance qualities – iridescence-free reflector Finest aluminium and silver plating by sputtering Sputtering is a unique. – ideal temperature manand sealed. perInstallation instructions No-tool installation The mounting ring made of die-cast aluminium is fitted without tools using spring clips. smooth agement allows lamps to and wallwasher finishes are operate in optimum output available. The ballast box has a rapid locking device and forms a pre-assembled luminaire unit with the reflector. – optimum reflection so-called high-purity silver.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 25 . Combined refl. is of heat precisely applied onto the – longer lamp service life high-quality polycarbonate thanks to reduced temreflectors of the PANOS L+H peratures ranges by means of sputtering. fect glare control and ideal light distribution – high-quality appearance with darklight effect and iridescence-free reflector – extremely easy maintenance and easy cleaning The Lighting Handbook www. highquality 4-chamber metallising process applied at high vacuum. Benefits: – optimum lighting effect at high efficiency levels. Facetted.

PANOS M and MWW give lighting designers maximum freedom for professionally setting the lighting stage.zumtobel. and can be operated completely closed with IP54. Wide range of lamps With the wide range of lamps that can be fitted. PANOS M LG/HG and PANOS M LM/HM Outstanding surface properties and optimum thermal management ensure maximum luminous flux when fitted with 2 x 42 W TC-TELI. PANOS MWW As regards its look on the ceiling. Mounting rings and cooling attachments made of die-cast aluminium.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . the wallwasher with asymmetrical light distribution is not different from rotationally symmetrical luminaires.PANOS M/MWW – Impressive and powerful PANOS M Metal reflector for high temperature resistance. It is ideal for use with strict fire regulations. Ideal for use with lamps that generate a lot of heat. 26 / Chapter 3 www. The luminaire is light-tight in the ceiling. It does not interfere with the interior design.

As the lighting head and the housing are separately adjustable. providing more freedom for vertical adjustment With PANOS S fully swivelled out to 60°.com/productsites . Suitable reflectors for any situation Comparing light distribution/room: length 5 m. PANOS S can be swivelled into the ceiling by up to 45°. height 3 m Accent lighting by PANOS S150 with HIT G8.5 4 x PANOS S150 FL 70 W 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 Accent lighting by PANOS S200 with HIT G12 4 x PANOS S200 FL 70 W 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 Wallwashing by PANOS S250 with HIT-DE The Lighting Handbook 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 3 x PANOS S250 70 W Chapter 3 / 27 www. For illumination of different levels of shelving.PANOS S – Incredibly versatile. it is possible to illuminate a wall from its top edge. specific areas can be shaded.zumtobel.

matt and painted – various cover frames: white. made of high-quality UV-resistant polycarbonate for perfect light distribution. Persuasive freedom of design – various reflector optics: faceted.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Less installation time – PANOS no-tool quick installation – “shift & lock” system for fixing cover frame – quick and easy subsequent installation of attachements . smooth. frameless PANOS Q Low – trendy attachments fitted as block or frame – suspended attachment and technical lighting accessories PANOS Q High Reflector models faceted smooth matt white Frame models titanium chrome white frameless model Attachments Attachments 28 / Chapter 3 www. light-tight.PANOS Q – Square downlight for uncompromising looks and lighting technology Perfect one-piece reflector base Consistently square reflector. chromium. titanium.zumtobel.

painted.zumtobel. flat circular design Overview of the PANOS range PANOS M LG/HG 200/250 PANOS M LM/HM PANOS MWW 150/200 smooth. matt. smooth. IR/UV-free light PANOS A/AD Surface-mounted PANOS Q 190/190 250/250 faceted. optimum. smooth. can be swivelled in and out. high light output ratio. painted. design freedom (colours + attachments) 1000 lm/2000 lm white light or 1000 lm BioMotion 2700/6500 K. exceptional. variety of surface finishes perfect glare control. illumination of vertical areas huge variety of light sources. wallwasher smooth. large variety of surface finishes perfect one-piece reflector base. partly structrured Features high light output ratio. painted. flood general lighting with high wattages. mounting depth only 100 mm. wallwasher faceted. calm. matt faceted.com/productsites for ceilings without mounting depth. matt. lhousing light-tight uniform illumination of vertical areas. DSE-compatible without attachment. perfect glare control. smooth. energy-efficient. matt Chapter 3 / 29 PANOS LED 150 smooth. consistent appearance. long service life. matt asymmetrical PANOS S 100/150/200/250 spot.The Lighting Handbook Type PANOS L Ceiling cut-out Light sources 175/200/250 PANOS H PANOS M 100/150/200/250 Reflector optic Light distribution faceted. painted matt . reduced building and installation costs. uniform ceiling look uncompromising flexibility. painted. glare control (DSE-compatible). smooth. highly convenient control www.

com/productsites The Lighting Handbook – patented sealing system to protect against penetration of surface water – various technical lighting accessories .PASO II – Recessed floor luminaire system PASO II knows just how to hit all the right buttons when it comes to setting dramatic contemporary lighting scenes whilst nevertheless remaining unobtrusive itself.zumtobel. (120 mm Ø or side length) (190 mm Ø or side length) (260 mm Ø or side length) – prestigious private settings. The luminaire housing and covers are Models: PASO II D/Q 120 – LED with LEDOS board units and PowerLED – QR-CBC and PAR 16 – “MicroLynxF” 7 W compact fluorescent lamps PASO II D/Q 190 – QR-CBC and QR 111 – TC-TEL compact fluorescent lamps – HIT-TC-CE 20 W PASO II D/Q 260 – PAR 38 – TC-TEL compact fluorescent lamps – LED floor lighting tile – HIT up to 70 W. HST 50 W Application: – shops & display windows – galleries & showrooms – hotels & wellness Benefits: – flush with floor or overlapping frame without visible screw heads – “glass-only” model – models with reduced surface temperature to protect people and property 30 / Chapter 3 round or square. A generous helping of lighting technology packed into models ranging in size from small to large allows fine-tuning to provide customised lighting solutions. indoor and outdoor areas www.

Pros: PASO II with LED technology – luminaires with LED boards for decorative pinpoint lighting in static version or with variable RGB colours PASO II – everything in the right light Guiding light – luminaires with PowerLEDs for lighting columns – lighting tile with variable RGB colours. low-profile design 190 mm HIT 20 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 10 W TC-DEL 260 mm HIT 20 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 18 W TC-DEL 370 mm HIT bis 70 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 18 W TC-DEL/TC-F 36 W The Lighting Handbook PASO II accessories for an impressive yet safe presence – colour filters for coloured – honeycomb meshes for glare accent lighting control – casting surround for quick – IR blocking filters for reducing and safe installation surface temperature – mounting kit for cavity floors/ – anti-slip glass panel available hollow ceilings for fixing PASO upon request II luminaires with overlapping – IP 67 general-purpose box for frame cover external control gear (PASO II S) www.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 31 .zumtobel. without impacting on the structural calculations of concrete ceilings Wallwashers 100 mm PASO II D/Q range. for recess into floor Spot and superspot Floodlighting PASO II extra low-profile design Use in screeded floors.

com/productsites The Lighting Handbook The “Photometric examination of new lighting systems” research carried out at TU Ilmenau demonstrates that systems using MPO technology obtain excellent values with respect to contrasts in the room. Together with two other layers. the light distribution curve of the luminaire’s indirect component can be adjusted to the suspension height of the luminaire. 2 designs available – structured and homogeneous. Via adjustable reflectors. mum energy efficiency. it forms an optical system that ensures glare control in conformity with relevant standards at flat angles (EN 12464) and reduced luminance at steep angles.VAERO – Waveguide luminaire providing soothing light for people and rooms Design by Hartmut S. Diffusor layer Micro-pyramidal layer for directing light Base 32 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel. . in the task area and on the screen. Engel Ingeniously designed VAERO waveguide luminaire with MPO lighting technology for maxiBalance between energy efficiency and lighting quality The sandwich construction of the micropyramidal optic lets the light really sparkle.

zumtobel. Balanced luminance levels create a pleasant. the viewability of computer screens is excellent. The variable pendant length of VAERO and adjustable indirect components are unique. natural working atmosphere. ceilings and walls have a major impact. Contrast rendition in the task area Visual contrasts in the task area are determined by luminance ratios. Thanks to the MPO diffuser – and reduced luminance –. and no matter what the angle of inclination. too. www. e.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 33 . screens must remain The Lighting Handbook free from annoying reflections. Contrasts between ceiling and luminaire Bright ceilings open up a room. The luminaires and their luminance levels blend harmoniously into the brightness pattern of the ceiling. Contrast rendition on screens In every location.Lighting quality created by contrast engineering Contrasts in the room Brightness perceived at the workplace is determined not only by illuminance – in fact. g. The reduced luminance of the MPO diffuser helps to improve contrast rendition (see TU Ilmenau research). ink colour on background.

the sandwich construction of the micro-pyramidal optic ensures both glare control in conformity with standards and reduced luminance for direct illumination – ideal for office lighting according to standard EN 12464. diffuser layer 34 / Chapter 3 www.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook base micro-pyramidal layer for directing the light .zumtobel.LIGHT FIELDS – Modular micro-pyramidal lighting system Design by Sottsass Associati Pure innovation for the office Micro-pyramidal optic Even in surface-mounted and recessed luminaires.

com/productsites Chapter 3 / 35 .zumtobel.Available as recessed/surface-mounted/pendant/ free-standing or cluster luminaires. they are ideal for the more stylish office. Recessed 1198 x 298 2/28 W T16 1498 x 298 2/35 W T16 598 x 598 4/14 W T16 1248 x 310 2/28 W T16 1548 x 310 2/35 W T16 623 x 623 4/14 W T16 Surfacemounted 1248 x 310 2/28 W T16 1548 x 310 2/35 W T16 623 x 623 4/14 W T16 ID pendant 1248 x 310 2/54 W T16 1548 x 310 2/49 W T16 623 x 623 4/24 W T16 Free-standing luminaire 3/55 W TCL 3/80 W TCL LIGHT FIELDS model Recessed L-FIELDS E 4 x 4/14 W T16 L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS E 6 x 4/14 W T16 Surface-mounted L-FIELDS A 4 x 4/14 W T16 L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS A 3 x 2/35 W T16 L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS A 6 x 4/14 W T16 M 625 M 600 1-person office • 2-person office • • • 3-person office • • • • • • • • The Lighting Handbook www. with EN 12464 compliance over a range of ceiling heights and floor areas.

com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . pleasant room impression …or “cave effect” with convenwith MELLOW LIGHT IV… tional solutions using louvre luminaires. Design by Studio & Partners Technical lighting features: – bright visible luminance levels create an attractive impression of brightness – light is distributed uniformly in the room. 100 50 0 100 Efficiency level of 67 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with slotted sheet steel controller optic and two 24 W T5 lamps Effiency level of more than 80 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with microprismatic optic and two 24 W T5 lamps 50 0 Bright. not only is a high level Efficiency level of 57 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with slotted sheet steel controller optic and 55 W TC-L lamp Efficiency level of more than 70 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with microprismatic optic and 55 W TC-L lamp of uniformity achieved on the useful plane.MELLOW LIGHT IV – A piece of sky Balance. In the process. 36 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel. MELLOW LIGHT IV surface-mounted and recessed luminaires bring a “piece of sky” into the room. energy efficiency and lighting quality Owing to their light distribution characteristics. but room peripheries such as ceilings and walls can be selectively brightened up as well. This allows for active brightness management.

40 – 90 Laptops 55 – 90 Flatscreens 65 – 90 Conventional display 0 – 10 Organizer 0 – 40 Displays The more strongly inclined a computer display is.zumtobel. Micro-prismatic optic with cross pattern – innovative optic for maximum energy efficiency – gentle light for ergonomically beneficial lighting conditions – in line with the basic concept of Mellow Light – screening prevents direct view of light source – ideal for upright and inclined displays (luminance reduced at all angles of view) – free arrangement in the room. efficient louvre technology and the typical gentle lighting effects of Mellow Light – glare control for upright displays meets specifications of EN12464 (with or without extra filter.Application and glare control Direct and reflected glare on upright and steeply inclined displays is minimised. allowing for lighting solutions in conformity with the EN 12464 standard. depending on luminaire model) Chapter 3 / 37 The Lighting Handbook www.com/productsites . without taking position of workstation into account (demonstrated by TU Illmenau research) Slotted sheet steel controller optic – design-oriented slotted sheet steel controller optic – gentle light for ergonomically beneficial lighting conditions – in line with the basic concept of Mellow Light – screening prevents direct view of light source – ideal for upright and inclined displays (luminance reduced at all angles of view) – free arrangement in the room. the higher are the requirements for glare control of the lighting system – in particular where it has been installed directly above the workstation. without taking position of workstation into account (demonstrated by TU Ilmenau research) Louvre optic – classic with louvre technology in conformity with relevant standards – combination of proven.

com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .zumtobel. diffuse lighting fascinates the viewer. controlled via EMOTION Touch 38 / Chapter 3 www. a room’s ambience can be changed radically. – entrance areas – conference and meeting rooms – shops Models: – 2 heights: 80 mm and 150 mm – 80 mm for white and monochrome – 150 mm for RGB – from 4/14 W to 12/21 W – 600 x 600 mm 900 x 900 mm – dynamic colour changes.CIELOS – Modular luminous ceiling for creating designs with light and colour Design by Nicholas Grimshaw & Partners Application: Luminous ceilings capture our attention. Wide-area. Combined with selective accents.

zumtobel. Mounting heights often range from 300 to 700 mm.Pros: Conventional luminous ceilings use almost no lighting technology at all. They rely exclusively on maximum clearance between lamp and diffuser in order to produce uniform illumination. yet hardly any of these luminous ceilings offers the same colour neutrality and infinite colour spectrum as CIELOS. They are available as accessories in the three primary colours red. pure light were developed for CIELOS. Coloured lamps or sheathing the T16 light sources in coloured film produces coloured light.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 39 . Any other coloured film suitable for use in luminaires can also be used. green and blue. Special coloured films that emit especially intense. The Lighting Handbook www.

friendly room atmosphere – in conformity with EN 12464 standard Surface finishes: powder-coated titanium or natural anodised finish Opal diffuser – closed luminaire – diffuse light distribution – harmoniously soft light creates communicative room atmosphere Easy design: easy design is ensured by standard module lengths The Lighting Handbook 40 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel. Its angular shape and clear lines are unmistakable features of CLARIS II. Bonn – meets requirements for lighting of office areas according to EN 12464 Optics for all applications: Darklight louvre – specular louvre ensures ideal glare control according to EN 12464 Matt comfort louvre – bright. Complete range: – indirect/direct pendant luminaire – surface-mounted luminaire – wallwasher Application: – offices and schools Lighting technology: – miniature cell louvre used – DSE-compatible luminaire Design by ag Licht.CLARIS II – Luminaire system Minimised design with improved technical lighting features.com/productsites .

Practical technology Lamps are replaced straightforwardly from the top of the luminaire.zumtobel. adjustment in longitudinal direction All inclusive Luminaire includes pre-installed suspension assembly. transparent connecting cable already fitted. releasing and replacing the light source is child’s play.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 41 . Thanks to the convenient lever. light source already integrated. Installation: time is money Invisible height adjustment inside. plus protective film Can be used for continuous row lighting CLARIS II configurations Continuous row luminaires (pendant luminaires): – indirect/direct – direct only – indirect only – wallwasher Connectors for continuous design 300 225 225 225 300 150 300 The Lighting Handbook 300 www.

zumtobel.RTX II – Design-oriented continuous row lighting system Design by Charles Keller Avant-garde in terms of both material and shape Application: offices and schools Individual luminaires and continuous row systems: – Pure aluminium – Matt bivergent or darklight reflector optic – Wallwasher for illuminating blackboards – Decorative optics Typical applications RTX II-C 1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W Day school Technical college/ evening school Office Office with DSE Open-plan office Technical drawing RTX II-D 1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W 42 / Chapter 3 www.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Day school Technical college/ evening school Office Office with DSE Open-plan office Technical drawing .

40 blackboard – luminaire distance [m] optimum range possible range possible range under certain conditions* The Lighting Handbook * Use strongly depends on architectural parameters and luminaire arrangement.00 1.40 0. www.80 1.40 blackboard – luminaire distance [m] optimum range possible range possible range under certain conditions* * Use strongly depends on architectural parameters and luminaire arrangement.80 1.20 0.RTX II Wallwasher RTX II 1 x 49 W RTX II 1 x 54 W RTX II 1 x 80 W RTX RTX RTX RTX II II II II 2 x 28 W 2 x 35 W 2 x 49 W 2 x 54 W 300 Lux (Day school) 0.zumtobel.60 0.20 1.00 1.40 0.20 1.20 0.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 43 .60 0. RTX II 1 x 80 W RTX II 2 x 49 W RTX II 2 x 54 W 500 Lux (Evening school and technical colleges) 0.

schools. This keeps the installation effort to a minimum. resources and energy that would otherwise be spent on lamp procurement. Electrical connection Quick installation is also guaranteed thanks to the exactly centered 5-pole plug-in terminal (CE-compliant) easily accessible from outside the luminaire. Packaging The mounting brackets are located ready for use outside the box so there is no need to open it. Thus the connecting cable can be fitted conveniently and in minimum time without needing to open the luminaire housing. simply pull away the film which leaves no residue. and even used to light the construction site. shops Benefits: – BIVERGENZ® plus lighting technology – quick installation thanks to – mounting bracket – externally located terminal block – pre-fitted lamp – protective film Lay in Fold up Snap in Design by Studio Ambrozus Light source included MIRAL T16 is pre-fitted with an LF840 lamp (optionally LF830).zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . transport and temporary storage. Once the building is finished. MIRAL T16 can therefore be fully installed whilst building work is still in progress. Advantage: the luminaire remains protected in its packaging during preinstallation. Protective film A special self-adhesive protective film made of recyclable material offers optimum protection against louvre soiling. 44 / Chapter 3 www.MIRAL T16 – Surface-mounted louvre luminaire Complete louvre luminaire range: – surface-mounted luminaire – indirect/direct pendant luminaire – wallwasher Application: offices. saving the time.

com/productsites Chapter 3 / 45 . MIRAL T16 installation for the electrician means getting the same result in half the time! The Lighting Handbook www.Traditional installation MIRAL T16 installation Traditional installation for the electrician meant four trips up and down the ladder.zumtobel. two operations with the electric screwdriver.

zumtobel. directly above workstation and at right angle to window – one luminaire per workstation ensures lighting conditions in conformity with relevant standards Design by Ingenhoven and Partner Architekten FREELINE (matt bivergent louvre) FREELINE (MPO technology) 46 / Chapter 3 www.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .FREELINE – The TASK AREA luminaire – TASK AREA luminaire for task area-related indirect/ direct lighting – luminaires are arranged between room axes.

com/productsites Chapter 3 / 47 .zumtobel.Lighting technology: matt bivergent louvre for optimum lighting conditions at the workstation – Wattages: 1/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 1/80 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 2/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 Models with electronic ballast. DALI-dimmable or dimming-on-demand function (LDoD) – Designed by: IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek Architekten)/Düsseldorf – Dimensions: length 2436 mm (54 W) or length 3036 mm (80 W) width 98 mm height 62 mm weight: 4.5 kg – Material: extruded aluminium. DALI-dimmable or dimming-on-demand function (LDoD) – Designed by: IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek Architekten)/Düsseldorf – Dimensions: length 2436 mm (54 W) or length 2736 mm (80 W) width 98 mm height 62 mm weight: 4.5 kg – Material: extruded aluminium. natural anodised finish Lighting technology: micro-pyramidal optic with glare-free light radiation characteristics – Wattages: 2 x 1/49 W T16 2 x 1/54 W T16 2 x 1/80 W T16 Models with electronic ballast. natural anodised finish The Lighting Handbook www.

KAREA. allow for low level heights. are customised and energyefficient.. MINIUM LITE. energy efficiency and reduced installed load Design by Engel & Zimmermann – indirect/direct distribution – 2 x 1/55 W or 2 x 1/80 W TC-L – large direct component with cell louvre in darklight or matt comfort optic – glare reduction L<1000 cd/m2 – two separate luminaire heads made of anodised aluminium – heads pre-assembled for extremely quick installation – stand made of anodised aluminium – U-shaped steel base 48 / Chapter 3 www. … can be personalised.. Free-standing uplights … … provide maximum flexibility when changing or reorganising one’s place. as required and independent of the building.zumtobel. … focus light onto the visual task area.Free-standing uplights – LIGHT FIELDS-S.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . … can be positioned freely at the workplace. LANOS . … can be installed quickly. easily. … don’t have to be installed on/in the ceiling. LIGHT FIELDS-S Brilliant light thanks to innovative MPO-PLUS technology Design by Sottsass Associati – indirect/direct distribution – asymmetrical indirect component – 3/55 W or 3/80 W TC-L – direct component via micropyramidal optic – glare reduction L<1000 cd/m2 (3/55 W) – reflector can be swung open for easy cleaning – flat luminaire head made of anodised aluminium – backlit decorative frame attached MINIUM LITE Max.

or symmetrical luminaire-head connection – U-shaped or square base (steel) – colours: titanium. or silver microstructure paint – available in heights of 1850 mm or 2000 mm LANOS Pleasant lighting effect in a classic design Design by DaCosta & Wolf – indirect/direct distribution – 4/55 W TC-L – luminaire head with lateral perforated metal refractors – rounded aluminium stand with asymmetrical or symmetrical luminaire-head connection – U-shaped or square steel base – colours: titanium.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 49 . free-standing uplights by ZUMTOBEL provide the perfect solution meeting any requirement.zumtobel.KAREA Flexible design – unobtrusive appearance Design by DaCosta & Wolf – indirect/direct distribution – 4/55 W TC-L – direct component via perforated metal optic – flat luminaire head – angular aluminium stand with asym. SwitchDim Simple dimming and switching using momentary-action switches SensControl Fully automatic control based on daylight and the user’s presence SensControl-DALI additional option for link to LITENET lighting management systems www. or silver microstructure paint – available in heights of 1850 mm or 2000 mm The Lighting Handbook SwitchDim and SensControl allow users to adjust the lighting to meet their personal requirements. From simple switching and dimming through to fully automatic control using presence detectors and brightness sensors. SensControlDALI goes even further by using DALI to integrate the free-standing uplight into the building’s lighting management system.

is one of the main benefits. cove lighting in dynamic colours can be generated in a space-saving and energy-efficient manner. The light can be optimally directed into the area required by means of lens optics.LED luminaires – From semiconductor to lighting innovation Static and dynamic light Benefits of LED technology: – long service life = low maintenance costs – low power consumption = minimum operating costs – vibration and impact-proof – compact size Benefits of LED technology in comparison with low-voltage halogen – high colour stability – efficient control thanks to simple control system – low heat generation – light without IR/UV In comparison with low-voltage halogen. In addition to conservational lighting and long maintenance intervals. Moreover. and consequently the absence of any heat radiation. which means that the illumination output can be used much more efficiently. projected light is a main benefit. The energy efficiency of LEDs greatly exceeds that of low-voltage halogen luminaires. In comparison with compact fluorescent lamps.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .g. by means of LED RGB lighting solutions. e. light without IR/UV in particular. the benefits are slightly smaller. Benefits of LED technology in comparison with fluorescent lamps 50 / Chapter 3 www.

High-performance LEDs generate a lot of heat at the board side.Limits of LED technology Today.g. In order to ensure a service life of 50. ventilator or water cooling).g. If LEDs are used at high ambient temperatures (e. The Lighting Handbook www. this will strongly effect luminous flux and reduce the LEDs’ service life. sauna.000 hours for an LED luminaire. the LED is less energyefficient than the following lamp technologies: – fluorescent lamps: 80–100 lm/W – high-pressure halogen lamps: 90–100 lm/W – high-pressure sodium vapour lamps: 100–120 lm/W – LEDs: 40–80 lm/W LEDs don’t like high ambient temperatures.). etc. cooling fins. the boards must be properly cooled (e.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 51 .zumtobel.

dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear! 52 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites .Typical applications Properties – 1000 lm projected light – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – “stand-alone” variation has a 4-button control panel for setting colour temperature with six pre-defined steps – RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel or DMX – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – RGB colour dynamism via DMX – 1000 lm and 2000 lm as an alternative to 18 W/26 W compact fluorescent lamps – colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K – 1000 lm projected light – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel or DMX – swivelling recessed downlights for decorative accent lighting – 350 lm projected light as an alternative to 20 W low voltage halogen – indirect RGB light for “mellow downlight” effect in dynamic colours – 1000 lm as an alternative to 18 W compact fluorescent lamps – colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K – 1100 lm projected light with 3000 K – 1300 lm projected light with 4000 K – projected LED accent light as an alternative to 75 W low voltage halogen * with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires.

Supply 230 V Switchable/ dimmable* switchable. 230 V switchable. dimmable DALI white indoor applications 2LIGHT MINI PureWh. dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel) white indoor applications VIVO LED www. dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel).com/productsites Chapter 3 / 53 . dimmable white blue indoor applications PANOS S 24 V switchable. dimmable DALI white indoor applications PANOS PureWhite 230 V dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel) control of white light via RGB RGB indoor applications PANOS BioMotion 350 mA switchable. dimmable DALI RGB + white indoor applications 2LIGHT MINI RGB/W 230 V switchable. dimmable DMX dimmable DALI. dimmable DMX Monochrome/ RGB control of white light via RGB RGB Indoor/outdoor applications indoor applications Product TEMPURA spotlight 230 V control of white light via RGB RGB indoor applications TEMPURA downlight 230 V switchable.zumtobel.

slot and channel mounting – SYSTEMLED Deco Basic optimised for cove lighting – not suitable for installation in floors! – IP 68 version for underwater lighting – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg * with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires.Typical applications Properties – 300 lm projected light – 3000 K and 4700 K colour temperatures – system combines miniaturised LED spots for accent lighting with T16 fluorescent lamps for wallwashing – LED light lines for room illumination and atmospheric lighting effects – single and nine-fold modules – nine-fold modules feature dynamic light design whereby the individual lighting cubes can be randomly dimmed up and down – colour temperature via control button in six pre-defined steps from 2700–6500 K – luminaire is part of the SCONFINE pendant luminaire series – illuminance in accordance with EN 1838 for additional emergency lighting close to ground level – unique lens/reflector optic ensures optimal light distribution on the floor – available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5000 K – modular LED light line system for individual.zumtobel.com/productsites . dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear! 54 / Chapter 3 www. slot and channel mounting – not suitable for installation in floors! – modular LED light line system for individual.

Supply 24 V

Switchable/ dimmable* switchable, dimmable

Monochrome/ RGB white

Indoor/outdoor applications indoor applications

Product

MICROS

24 V 230 V

switchable, dimmable (light lines)

white RGB (light lines)

indoor applications

SUPERSYSTEM

230 V

switchable

monochrome

indoor applications

SCONFINE CUBO

230 V

switchable, dimmable

white

indoor applications

SCONFINE SFERA

230 V 350 mA

switchable, dimmable

white blue

indoor applications outdoor applications
ORILED

24 V

switchable, dimmable

white blue RGB

indoor applications outdoor applications
SYSTEMLED FLOOD

24 V

switchable, dimmable

white blue RGB

indoor applications outdoor applications
SYSTEMLED DECO

230 V 24 V

switchable, dimmable

yellow red green white blue

indoor applications outdoor applications
LEDOS M

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 55

Typical applications

Properties – 8 mm mounting depth allows installation in parquet, tiles and laminated flooring – suitable for installation in furniture – walk-over capacity to max. 250 kg

– accent spotlight (spot/flood) – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg

– available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5700 K – uniformly illuminated light points or surfaces – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg

– diffuser with transparent sides gives the luminaire unit a floating appearance – model without frame also available

– extremely easy wiring via self-tapping cable connector for indoor applications

– walk-over capacity to max. 500 kg – RGB models feature integrated DALI power supply unit – also available as a wall-mounted version

– also available as a decorative floor lighting tile (IP 67)

– “glass only” model available for indoor applications – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg

* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!

56 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Supply 24 V

Switchable/ dimmable* switchable, dimmable

Monochrome/ RGB white blue

Indoor/outdoor applications indoor applications

Product

LEDOS O

230 V 24 V 350 mA

switchable, dimmable

white blue RGB

indoor applications outdoor applications
LEDOS B

230 V 24 V

switchable, dimmable

white blue RGB

indoor applications outdoor applications
LEDOS

230 V 24 V

switchable, dimmable

white blue RGB

indoor applications outdoor applications
LEDOS II

230 V 24 V

switchable, dimmable

yellow red green white blue RGB white blue RGB

indoor applications outdoor applications
KAVA LED

230 V

switchable, RGB dimmable DALI

indoor applications outdoor applications
PHAOS LINE

24 V

dimmable

RGB

indoor applications

PHAOS lighting tile

230 V 24 V 350 mA

switchable, dimmable

white blue RGB

indoor applications outdoor applications
PASO II LED

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 57

SYSTEMLED – Modular LED light lines

SYSTEMLED is a modular LED system for decorative light lines or wide-area illumination of walls. Pre-assembled plugin connectors at the modules help to reduce sources of error during installation, and minimise installation effort. The use of aluminium sections ensures optimum cooling of LED boards, which is a prereq-

uisite to reach a service life of up to 50,000 hours! Varied accessories including a mounting channel, mounting springs and a diffuser provide for a wide range of applications. SYSTEMLED can be used in both indoor and outdoor areas.

Channel installation: No-tool wiring using cables with pre-configured connectors. Using special steel springs, the modules are fitted in the channel or wall and ceiling cut-out without the use of any tools.

58 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Options for installation: Pre-assembled modules in various lengths allow to flexibly adjust the light lines to projectspecific sections. DECOLINE is perfect for illuminating coves and for creating

light lines uniformly illuminated by means of a diffuser. FLOODLINE provides uniform illumination of vertical areas (wallwashing).

individual slot channel diffuser* installation installation installation DECOLINE IP 40 • • • • DECOLINE IP 65 • • FLOODLINE IP 40 • • • FLOODLINE IP 65 •
* In DECOLINE IP 40, the diffuser is clipped onto the LED module. For DECOLINE IP 65, modules are supplied optionally with transparent or diffuse optic.

SYSTEMLED Deco: Clip-on diffuser for perfect uniformity.

The Lighting Handbook

SYSTEMLED Deco Basic: Easy to install in the cove thanks to ready-to-connect modules inc. connecting cables.

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 59

ORILED – Orientation lighting close to ground level with LED
ORILED Functional is fitted with an LED optic (patent pending) that provides illuminance in conformity with the EN 1838 standard. ORILED Decorative, with its warm or blue light colour, is used in areas where the focus is on a decorative lighting effect. By using different control gear, the luminaires can be easily integrated into building management systems such as LUXMATE or the ONLITE emergency lighting system.

In emergency cases, too, additional escape route lighting is ensured via a central battery or 1 h/3 h separate battery packs. The luminaires with IP 65 protection can be used for a broad range of applications. A variety of accessories is available for easy luminaire installation.

ORILED Functional: light distribution at ground level

60 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

its reflector combined with its unique lens optic. By means of flexible mounting brackets. The Lighting Handbook Bollard with recessed 350 mA luminaire Recessed housing with flushfitted luminaire Chapter 3 / 61 www.Besides its two 1 W LEDs. or in the surface-mounted housing.com/productsites . the secret of ORILED’s excellent illuminance is. mounting frame or casting surround. the luminaires are fixed in the wall cut-out. bollard. The stainless steel frame is fixed to the luminaire housing via CAMLOCK fasteners.zumtobel. in particular. ORILED therefore has no visible screw heads.

stairs and waiting areas – applications in temporarily or permanently humid/damp environments (e. HELISSA round Application: – indoor areas such as corridors. station concourses) – aggressive environments (chlorine or saline-contaiModels: Model HELISSA IP 40 Size D/Q 360 D/Q 450 HELISSA IP 65 D/Q 360 HELISSA square ning environments. In addition to round or square glare-free optics.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Lamp(s) 2/9 W TC-SEL 1/22 W T16-R 1/55 W T16-R 2/18 W TC-L 1/22 W T16-R 2/18 W TC-DEL . can be easily installed and maintained. from inside to outside. a discreet indirect light component creates a white or coloured lighting corona on the wall or ceiling.HELISSA – Stylish appearance with individuality for indoor and outdoor areas The decorative HELISSA wall/ceiling mounted luminaire with protection types IP 40 and IP 65 sets both indoor and outdoor areas masterfully centre stage while saving energy. entrance areas – public spaces All applications. Emergency lighting and dimmable models. too. wellness areas) – outdoor areas around the house.zumtobel.g. highquality design using one luminaire range! 62 / Chapter 3 www. can be implemented in the same.

the lighting corona’s colour can be changed by fitting foil filters. diffuser unit (diffuser + aluminium frame) can be installed without tools thanks to twist and lock mechanism – HELISSA IP 65: round or square fitting with silicone seal and glass cover. Accessories: Set of foil filters (red. brightly polished/with protective coating economically efficient and flexible – luminaires are optionally switchable or analog/digitally dimmable – models in all design sizes/ versions are available in the same design and size with built-in 1 h or 3 h emergency lighting unit – all components are accommodated in the fitting All these features give HELISSA its unmistakable individuality. frosted glass diffuser – glare-free and uniform illumination – high energy efficiency.zumtobel. titanium or aluminium. yellow) to create corona For more creative scope. cover frame is fixed without tools by means of CamLock fasteners – concealed screws – decorative cover frame optionally in white.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 63 . rugged polycarbonate diffuser – HELISSA IP 65: die-cast aluminium fitting.Benefits/pros: high-quality and efficient – optimum materials for the respective application area: – HELISSA IP 40: sheet steel fitting. compact/fluorescent lamps operated exclusively with electronic ballast convenient and versatile – easy installation – HELISSA IP 40: round fitting. The Lighting Handbook www. blue.

TECTON – Continuous-row lighting system TECTON Compact TECTON Retail TECTON-I Industry Design by Nicholas Grimshaw & Partners 64 / Chapter 3 www.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .zumtobel.

All components can be combined logically and simply in the modular system. making TECTON both versatile and easy to handle.TECTON provides flexibility Layout changes occur at ever shorter intervals in retail. but lower qualified and hence cheaper staff can do the work. TECTON allows the luminaire modules to be placed anywhere on the trunking. TECTON provides safety TECTON provides safety in several ways: – At the design stage. by the integration of mains lighting. The specially designed power conductor integrated in the trunking revolutionises installation.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 65 . Technical alterations to the lighting can also be made on site. the better”. with 11-pole wiring allowing any modifications in terms of brightness control or emergency lighting supply in conformity with relevant standards. demanding maximum flexibility from any continuous-row lighting system. TECTON saves on installation costs “The easier. business and industry. Not only does this save time. reducing TECTON installation costs by up to 60 percent through time savings. depending on the continuous row configuration chosen. emergency lighting and control. – By the ONLITE emergency luminaire range that can be fully customized to the TECTON system for safety and reliability of the lighting solution in conformity with relevant standards. – By the clear separation of emergency and escape-sign luminaires in two emergency-lighting circuits. The Lighting Handbook www.

TECTON – High-pressure modules for shops. . TECTON-H RSR Making homogeneous illuminated areas and wall surfaces come alive: using lighting technology with asymmetrical distribution. for instance. IR. it is easy to respond to any changes in room layout.zumtobel. meat and cold-meat filters makes the goods displayed appear delicious and tempting. Thanks to wideangle lighting technology. hypermarkets and supermarkets TECTON-H RBS The module for flexible lighting concepts: with the swivelling luminaire head. it is possible to create lighting focuses and. precisely accentuate shelves.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook TECTON-H RSRA The surface-mounted model adds refreshing lighting accents for the illumination of counters and fresh goods. TECTON-H R A high-pressure module that provides highlights: wide-angle or narrow-beam lighting technology strikingly emphasises seasonal and pallet goods using directional light. 66 / Chapter 3 www. Light with asymmetrical distribution in combination with special accessories such as UVA. retail islands can be created using directed light. also enabling optimum illumination of gondola heads. pinpointed and brilliant.

Featuring a 50 % indirect and 50 % direct light component. wide-area luminance levels on softly rounded surfaces. Providing ambient lighting. The wide-angle. or cool ambient lighting at the bar. it is ideal for use in demanding office applications and at POS terminals in retail areas. The Lighting Handbook The pool-light optic made of opal plastic impresses with harmonious. it is also ideal for combination with accent lighting in retail areas. www. preferably in long corridor areas.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 67 .TECTON – Decorative optics With its innovative darklight miniature cell louvre made of aluminised polycarbonate.zumtobel. the indirect/direct optic provides a new interpretation of ID lighting in a continuous-row lighting system. sophisticated zonal lighting in retail areas. It is a perfect choice for wellness areas. The MELLOW LIGHT optic with its lighting chamber in diffuser pearl material and a slotted grid-mesh optic provides appropriately glarereduced light with visible luminance levels. Specific applications include prestigious and retail areas with high aesthetic requirements. purely indirect lighting characteristics of the indirect optic ensure uniformly illuminated ceilings.

pendant.SOLINA – The new high-bay reflector luminaire The new SOLINA high-bay reflector luminaire boasts a striking cylindrical design. as traditional high-bay reflector luminaire – colour sequences possible via LED RGB combined with EMOTION touch panel or other DALI-controlled systems – colour sequences possible via LED RGB. prismatic glass cover – 2 food filters (M/CM+IR) – 2 coloured indirect filters (red + blue) 68 / Chapter 3 – industrial lighting. direct and indirect. a die-cast aluminium housing (for the first time ever. Design by Charles Keller Application: – shop/retail.zumtobel. adapter) – direct installation on the ceiling – accessories: IP 54 glass cover. as indirect lighting components – static colour situations possible via indirect colour filters in red and blue www. with focus on lighting fresh products – architecture-centred luminaire with ceiling illumination Benefits: – both lighting types. and also includes a version for direct installation on the ceiling. chain. direct and indirect lighting are combined in a high-bay reflector luminaire).com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . can be separately switched and dimmed – same lamp and reflector range as COPA D – additionally reflector painted in titanium – one unit – variety of installation options (cord. a relatively small height (34 cm).

One unit – a variety of mounting options: – cord – pendant – chain – adapter – direct installation on the ceiling Installation benefits: – easy and simple installation. prismatic reflector and metal reflector (also available in titanium-painted finish) www. 100 W HST – reflectors: plastic reflector (translucent or painted in titanium). 60–250 W QT 32. 85 W QL. LED-RGB – direct lighting optionally: 42–57 W TC-TELI.zumtobel. no-tool electrical installation on plug-in terminal in place – twist and lock mechanism makes closing luminaire easy The Lighting Handbook Models: – indirect lighting optionally: 22 W T-R 5. largely without tools – luminaire prewired. 70–150 W HIT.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 69 .

fully flexible light emission – smooth surfaces. staircases. e. nursery schools and canteens . changing rooms. wellness areas. laboratories. classrooms and nursery schools – opal: circulation areas.zumtobel. easy to clean – lamp and louvre protected against soiling Design by Studio Ambrozus 70 / Chapter 3 www.PERLUCE – Closed lighting system with excellent maintenance factor Closed surface-mounted luminaire with increased protection type IP 50 (IP 54) PERLUCE Opal – optional colour accents – excellent light output ratio – uniform. waiting rooms. easy to clean – excellent maintenance factor PERLUCE louvre – first closed surface-mounted louvre luminaire available on the market – optional colour accents – excellent light output ratio – suitable for high visual requirements – maintenance factor better than in open louvre luminaires – smooth surfaces. workshops. g. kitchens.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Application: – louvre: for high visual requirements in rooms where dust and dirt are present.

Lighting technology: – T16 technology with electronic ballast – louvre: Bivergence plus – darklight louvre. even when mounted end to end Models: PERLUCE linear PERLUCE wallwasher PERLUCE square Opal/louvre Opal 1/14 W T16 (IP 50) 1/35 W T16 (IP 54) 2/18 W TC-L (IP 50/54) 1/24 W T16 (IP 50) 1/49 W T16 (IP 54) 4/14 W TC-L (IP 50/54) 1/28 W T16 (IP 50) 1/35 W T16 (IP 50/54) 1/80 W T16 (IP 54) 1/49 W T16 (IP 50/54) 1/54 W T16 (IP 50/54) 2/35 W T16 (IP 54) 1/80 W T16 (IP 50/54) 2/49 W T16 (IP 54) 2/14 W T16 (IP 50) 2/28 W T16 (IP 50) 2/35 W T16 (IP 50) 2/49 W T16 (IP 50/54) Protection type Protection type Protection type IP 50 standard IP 54 standard IP 50 standard (IP 54) (IP 54) The Lighting Handbook www.zumtobel. ceiling brightened up by laterally perforated upper reflector – opal: opal optic. UGR < 22 or < 25 acc. UGR < 19 or < 16 acc. reduced luminance levels of L < 1000 cd/m2 at 65°. to EN 12464 Quality: – 1-lamp and 2-lamp models in same housing – excellent light output ratio and homogeneous illumination of luminaire – injection-moulded optic (generally thin luminaire walls) – high stability of optic – end-to-end installation without gaps – luminaries can be opened easily. to EN 12464.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 71 .

594 mm T16 1-/2-lamp 28/35/49 W.zumtobel. chemical resistance. 1.594 mm Special designs (available upon request): SCII. high-temperature and lowtemperature versions) and a unique. low-loss ballast. innovative design – smooth/ergonomic surfaces language and catches – high light output ratio thanks – 15° slope of all visible surto calculated. plastic catches. and stands for impact resistDesigned by Massimo Iosa Ghini S C U B A Shockproof Chemically resistant UV-stable Benefit-orientated Application-orientated ance. heavyduty electronic ballast. CHEMO diffuser. PMMA or CHEMO diffuser: T26 1-/2-lamp 18 W electr. 1.294 mm/1. innovative design language (oval. 72 / Chapter 3 emergency lighting.294 mm T26 1-/2-lamp 58 W electr. low-loss ballast. ballast. 1. SCUBA is the successor of FZ and IFP. user-friendliness and application-orientation. 1. aerodynamic). plastic catches. 684 mm T26 1-/2-lamp 36 W electr. ballast. UVstability. optimised prisfaces (recommended for food matic structure industry) – innovative sealing rim between – optionally with heavy-duty electronic ballast for longer basic housing and diffuser service life at high ambient – special CHEMO diffuser temperatures (combines benefits of PC and PMMA) Product range with PC. PMMA. CHEMO for diffusers. Benefits: – unique. low-loss ballast. PC. PMMA. ballast.294 mm/1.SCUBA – Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire with impressive problem-solving skills Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire boasting impressive problem-solving skills (SCII. 15° slope. in various IP 65 applications (dust-proof and jet-proof). hightemperature. halogen-free wiring The Lighting Handbook www. Materials use are optionally PC. low-temperature.594 mm T16 1-lamp 54/80 W. and polyester (GRP) for the basic housing.com/productsites .

www. 2/36 W. at 45 °C max. at 47 °C max.000 20.000 100. comparable to PMMA – substantial resistance to a large number of chemicals – impact resistance similar to PC Yellowness Index PC with UV-stabiliser PMMA and CHEMO 5 0 Weathering time (months) 60 80 100 120 Heavy-duty electronic ballasts The PC industry product range was specially designed for use in harsh industrial environments. even under tough environmental conditions. 2/36 W. Subtract 7 °C in case of through-wiring. at 47 °C max.000 service life (h) The Lighting Handbook Standard electronic ballast 1/58 W. 2/58 W. at 32 °C max.000 90. without through-wiring. to a limited extent Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) – 100 % UV-resistant – good chemical resistance – impact absorbing UV-resistance 30 25 20 15 10 CHEMO – extremely UV-resistant.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 73 . All T16 and T26 models ensure a long service life. 2/36 W. PC industry 1/58 W. at 35 °C max. Comparison of service life of a PC industry ballast compared with a standard electronic ballast. at 59 °C max. at 32 °C max.zumtobel.Properties of diffuser materials: Polycarbonate (PC) – UV-stabilised – extremely impact-resistant – chemically resistant. at 38 °C max.000 80. at 38 °C max.000 40. Measured values refer to ambient temperature. taking the SCUBA luminaire as an example Reliability SCUBA + standard electronic ballast SCUBA with PC industry: same service life at higher temperature SCUBA with PC industry: double service life at the same temperature 90 % 95 % 100 % 0 10. at 47 °C max. 1/36 W.000 60. at 35 °C max. 1/36 W.000 70. PC industry 1/58 W. 2/58 W. 2/58 W. 1/36 W.000 30. at 50 °C max.000 50.

zumtobel. durable design.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .CLEAN – Three-level luminaire concept for clean-rooms CLEAN – an overview Model CLEAN Supreme CLEAN Advanced CLEAN Classic Designs Installation Protection type type Square Linear Usable space Ceiling Surface• IP 65 IP 65 mounted • • • • Recessed Recessed IP 65 IP 54 IP 54 IP 20 All luminaires boast a highquality surface finish resistant to cleaning agents and Application: In healthcare settings – operating theatres – laboratories – air locks – intensive care units – emergency wards – examination and treatment rooms – recovery rooms – hallway and corridor areas – administrative areas – laundries and kitchens – doctors’ surgeries – healthcare and rehabilitation centres disinfectants. and have been given the ENEC mark for their rugged. In industry and engineering – electronics – electrical engineering – micromechanics – biogenetics – pharmaceutical and chemical companies – laboratory technology – genetic engineering – food technology – extremely critical areas of food production – food industry – hallway and corridor areas – laundries and large-scale catering establishments 74 / Chapter 3 www.

continuous glass diffuser – trouble-free operation in rooms with positive and negative pressure containment systems thanks to special valve system – easy installation of luminaires. issued by the Fraunhofer Institute – antistatic surface finish – frameless.CLEAN Supreme – IPA certificate for clean-room compatibility in clean-rooms in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO). convenient relamping CLEAN Advanced – IPA certificate for clean-room compatibility in clean-rooms in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO).com/productsites Chapter 3 / 75 . and high-quality workmanconvenient relamping ship CLEAN Classic – cover made of anodised aluminium – model with PMMA acrylic glass – extremely resistant materials and high-quality workmanship The Lighting Handbook www.zumtobel. issued by the Fraunhofer Institute – cover made of anodised aluminium – models with toughened safety glass or shatter-proof PMMA acrylic glass – trouble-free operation in rooms with positive and negative pressure containment systems thanks to special valve system – extremely resistant materials – easy installation of luminaires.

private dwellings and shops Plug&Play – pre-addressed and pre-programmed for hotel rooms – plug-in connections – locally as stand-alone system.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Safety: – emergency lighting can be – “crash channel” provides integrated light if controller fails – ZUMTOBEL ONLITE separate – quick and easy replacement.ZBOX – Plug&Play Lighting control system for hotels. no experts needed – direct connection via Ethernet (TCP/IP) – transparency of costs from design through to operation – can be upgraded using standard Luxmate bus components – 4 control points included – no addressing of luminaires. or networked with Luxmate bus – web tool for fine adjustment – no licence. except for RGBW (DALI Broadcast) Intuitive: – clear design layout and functions of control units – self-explanatory symbols Emotion: – lighting scenes – dynamism and controlled colour changes ZBOX-Controller: W: 372 mm H: 372 mm D: 60 mm ZBOX-Cxx: W: 86 mm H: 86 mm D 11 mm – control concept completely focused on guest – “ZBOX does what guests expect” – day and night scenes (networked with Luxmate add-on module: radio-controlled clock) 76 / Chapter 3 www. battery luminaires – preferably no special skills required NT3 versions with central moni.– dimmer with autoprotect toring in case of networking facility (overload protection for lighting loads) . no special skills required.

1 x left bed + 1 x right bed + 2 x room + 2 x bathroom + 2 x hall) – 2 x input “Key Card” and “Aux” – 230 V-AC. 100 %) – 1 x output (300 W) for RGBW control of wellness luminaire (DALI group numbers 1– 4.NIGHTLOGIC day/night scenes (various scenes are called up depending on the time of day) Pros: – energy savings – through lighting scenes at reduced cost lighting levels savings – operating costs – dimming increases service life of incandescent lamps longer maintenance cycles cost savings – fast – thanks to pre-addressing and plug-in connectors – do it yourself using the ZBOX.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 77 . max. 0 .5 W (networked = half standby) – 5 x input for DALI ZBOX Circle control unit – multiple allocation (e. 16 DALI loads) – 1 x output for 1 blinds/ curtain motor 230 V-AC Energy loss: – ZBOX Controller: light on 10 W (no dimmer). potentialfree – 1 x Luxmate bus connection (1 bus load) – 1 x RJ45 Ethernet LAN connection for web tool and service – 1 x SD card for backup/ restore (under development) – ZBOX DIMMER300: light on 0..Main functions: – scenes and individual adjustment – special control concept – functions adjustable via ZBOX. no DALI addressing. light off 1 W (stand-alone = full standby) 4.7 W The Lighting Handbook www.WEBTOOL – mains cut-off device – backup function with SD card (under development) – ZBOX. max.WEBTOOL – package optimised for workflow on site Technical data: – 8 x output (300 W) – switchable via relay – dimmable via DALI Broadcast (all electronic ballasts connected are dimmed simultaneously. of 10 DALI loads) – slot for 300 VA universal dimmer (20–300 VA.zumtobel..g.

This ensures that pictograms are uniformly illuminated at a minimum luminance level of 200 cd/m2. displayed via bicoloured LED – low installation effort 230 V AC SB 128 Controller 78 / Chapter 3 www.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook DALI control line NT 1/3 control test DALI bus connected: luminaires centrally monitored – individual configuration/ monitoring of luminaires – minimum testing effort – fully automatic test log book – max. Each ONLITE escape sign can be supplied via three different systems.ONLITE escape sign and emergency luminaires – Combining design and functionality All ONLITE escape sign luminaires are based on first-class lighting technology.zumtobel. functional reliability . but also pleasant. The respective type of supply is indicated by the luminaire’s name: NT 1/3 Separate battery supply with auto test and control test function (1 and 3 h stand-alone time) An attractive design and the use of high-quality materials guarantee not only maximum functionality and reliability. NSI Supplied via LPS system (communication via Power Line) DALI Supplied via CPS system (communication via DALI) 230 V AC NT 1/3 auto test – no DALI bus connected – fixed test cycle programmes are run automatically. unobtrusive integration with the interior design.

NSI – supply via LPS Communication with luminaires with PLC (power line control) via supply line. diesel generator or 2nd mains.zumtobel. – every DALI luminaire can be used as an emergency luminaire – minimum maintenance effort – interference-free data communication – no installation of additional monitoring modules in luminaires required – security function of final circuit (makes sure that luminaires can be switched on reliably if communication line is defective) The Lighting Handbook Design by Matteo Thun with Lutz Büsing www.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 79 . Monitored via DALI interface. All luminaires can be individually controlled and monitored. – maximum intrinsic safety thanks to self-contained systems – easy maintenance – low installation effort – reduced fire load – can be fully integrated into lighting management system DALI – supplied via CPS Supply via CPS.

1.ONLITE RESCLITE – A world champion in terms of lighting technology and energy efficiency With a Power LED and three sophisticated optics.5 W.zumtobel. Mounting options Recessed into ceiling – Minimum design effort. straightforward installation. – Minimum energy consumption and maximum installed load of 5 W.com/productsites . RESCLITE paves the way to a new era of emergency lighting.5 mm². Standard installation terminals for throughwiring up to 2. – Extremely easy to install and maintain. This means that only very small-scale supply and cable systems are needed. Surface-mounted on ceiling TECTON continuous-row lighting system The Lighting Handbook 80 / Chapter 3 www. Only a very small number of luminaires are required for emergency lighting in conformity with relevant standards. – Ideal light distribution thanks to optimum illumination. Strain relief devices and covers fixed without tools ensure quick. The only design work needed is the placing of spacing tables. Completely independent from general lighting. Power input in non-maintained mode approx.

9 14.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 81 . DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)) – Width of escape route: 2 m – Minimum illuminance across width 1 m: 1 lx – Uniformity higher than 40 : 1 – Maintenance factor considered: 0.0 Max.7 6.1 6.5 18.1 7.2 2.9 5.5 22.7 8.5 2.0 4.0 19. to EN 1838 The Lighting Handbook www. spacing (m) luminaire/luminaire a2 b2 13.zumtobel.0 16.4 12. spacing (m) wall/luminaire a1 b1 5.7 19.4 6.0 5.8 – Reflection factors: 0 – Complies with glare reduction acc.6 14.5 3.4 7.9 h a2 b2 a1 b1 a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and central battery (NSI.4 15.RESCLITE escape LED emergency luminaire for escape route lighting according to EN 1838 Mounting height in m h 2.1 7.3 Max.

5 lx – Uniformity higher than 40 : 1 – maintenance factor considered: 0.1 3.RESCLITE anti-panic LED emergency luminaire for anti-panic lighting according to EN 1838 Mounting height in m h 2.0 Max.9 10.2 2.3 8.4 10.zumtobel.5 3.0 4.2 2.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .5 3.4 3.9 11.6 12. DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3) 82 / Chapter 3 www.4 – rotationally symmetrical distribution – minimum illuminance: 0.5 0.5 11.8 h a2 b2 a1 b1 – Reflection factors: 0 – Complies with glare reduction acc.5 12. to EN 1838 a1 b1 a2 b2 a2 b2 a1 b1 a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and via central battery (NSI.9 0. spacing (m) wall/luminaire a1 b1 3.7 Max.0 5.1 9.1 3.9 0. spacing (m) luminaire/luminaire a2 b2 9.1 10.6 1.

3 3.0 4.5 3.8 h Ø a.zumtobel. b Ø a. illuminance level of 5 lx s for first-aid.4 2.– reflection factors: 0 bution – complies with glare reduc– minimum illuminance: 5 lx tion acc.0 Ø of light cone in m Øa Øb 2. to EN 1838 – maintenance factor considered: 0. to EN 1838 Min.0 2.0 5.7 2.1 2.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 83 . fire-fighting and reporting facilities: Mounting height in m h 2.8 – – rotationally symmetrical distri.RESCLITE spot LED emergency luminaire for increased illuminance levels acc. b The Lighting Handbook a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and via central battery (NSI.7 2. DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3) www.

Cord Wallclass range mounted suspension mounted source type on ceiling 90° wallmounted Recessed TECTON ONLITE LOOK product overview 84 / Chapter 3 RESCLITE LED IP 40 cV s ARTSIGN LED IP 20 cs 15 m 3) ERGOSIGN T16 8 W IP 40 410 Lm cs 15 m 3) 7.zumtobel.com/productsites PROOFSIGN LED LED IP 65 1) cs 20 m 3) COMSIGN T16 8 W IP 20 410 Lm cs 28 m 3) 15 m 4) .Type SurfaceLight Protection Protection Recognition mounted Pendant.6 m 5) The Lighting Handbook www.

to EN 1838 and DIN 4844 2) 4) lt.com/productsites 2) 1) with cable feed only 2) reduced to IP 40 3) acc.The Lighting Handbook COMSIGN II LED IP 20 cs 28 m 3) 15 m 4) PURESIGN LED IP 40 cs 30 m 3) 15 m 4) ECOSIGN T16 8 W IP 65 1) 410 Lm s 32 m 4) wc 16 m 2) www.zumtobel. VkF and SN EN 1838 (model for CH) 5) narrow side if mounted on the ceiling 3) ECOSIGN safety T16 8 W IP 65 1) 410 Lm s wc 3) Chapter 3 / 85 CUBESIGN TC-DEL IP 40 1/26 W cs 90 m 45 m 4) .

Design by NPK Industrial Design Application: – medically used rooms without high supply requirements – rehabilitation centres and nursing homes – homes for the elderly Designs: – single-bed luminaire with 580 mm mounting channel for flush integration of safety sockets. call system. telecommunication and data sockets – optional connection to medical supply systems. 86 / Chapter 3 www. for instance.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . giving them a feeling of privacy. if medical gases are needed. Multifunctional types of lighting and innovative longitudinal glare control provide ample evidence of BELIA’s efficiency and photometric qualities.BELIA – Single-bed luminaire Living-room ambience for medically used rooms As a single-bed luminaire that can optionally be fitted with supply modules.zumtobel. BELIA provides precise examination lighting for care personnel and glare-free reading light for patients.

com/productsites Chapter 3 / 87 100 .zumtobel.One luminaire – four lighting scenes: Room lighting Examination lighting Reading light Night lighting The Lighting Handbook L (reading light + room lighting): 1090 mm. 1390 mm L (plus night lighting): 1200 mm. 1500 mm 188 www.

communication and data sockets. medical gases 128 162 60 228 88 / Chapter 3 www.TETTOIA – Medical supply unit Flexibility in a pleasantly smooth design TETTOIA boasts plenty of scope for action. the supply components are flexibly integrated. the direct/indirect luminaire provides perfect light for any situation – at the press of a button and featuring convenient reset mechanisms. reading. This means that both patient and doctor are provided with perfect convenience.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook 32 .zumtobel. examination and night lighting – nursing rooms – optional supply of mainspower components. Thanks to three independent lighting elements. Design by NPK Industrial Design Application: – medically used rooms wit high supply requirements – patient rooms Modular systems: – supply unit boasts flexibility in terms of both design and technology – built-in lighting unit for general. Colours for the basic unit and lighting dormer can be chosen personally.

easy-to-clean closed designs. www.One luminaire – four lighting scenes: Room lighting Examination lighting Reading light Night lighting Prismatic diffuser for glare-free room lighting. The Lighting Handbook Supply components can be installed on the front and also on the underside. Freedom of choice for colours of basic unit and lighting dormer.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 89 .zumtobel.

.

. . . . . . . . Application notes. . . . . . . . . . . T16 fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . . . metal halide lamps . . . . Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 + 400 W . . . . . . Lamp descriptions acc. . . . . . . Application notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristic values of the major lamps . . . . . . . to LBS (ZVEI) . . . . . . Power consumption. . energy savings. . . . . . . . . The main lamp types . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 4 Lamps and ballasts Lamp selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp characteristics. Overview of LED control gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy efficiency of luminaires . 2 3–4 5 – 10 11 – 14 15 16 – 17 18 19 – 20 21 – 23 24 – 28 29 30 31 32 – 36 . Application notes. compact fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . required power . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of electronic ballasts. . . . . A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For instance. However. energy-efficient and environmentally compatible alternatives must be used increasingly in the future. Lamp characteristics can essentially be specified by the following key terms: Luminous flux/ efficiency Service life Light colour Colour rendition Drop in luminous flux Lamp characteristics Burning position Lamp power Warm-up time Re-start time Dimming capability The Lighting Handbook . In other situations. despite their low purchase price. incandescent lamps are still the most popular lighting option used in domestic areas to help create that cosy atmosphere. users happily tolerate the higher purchase price of discharge lamps because their high luminous efficiency and long lifetime make them economic. Thus it is part of the expertise of the lighting designer to find the most suitable lamp for a lighting task.Choosing the right lamp – An important first decision Choosing the right lamp depends on what is required of the lighting (see Chapter 2). Therefore. apart from having a short service life. these lamps generate only little light.

The system luminous efficiency also includes the power consumption of the ballast. It is affected by the red and blue colour components in the spectrum. due to the ageing of its chemical and physical components. being the time by which statistically half the lamps are still working (mortality). Service life The average service life is normally specified.Lamp characteristics 1. Luminous flux/luminous efficiency The luminous flux specifies the total amount of light generated by a lamp. Light colour The light colour describes the colour impression made by a white light source as relatively warm (ww = warm) or relatively cool (nw = intermediate. 4. tw = cool). 2. Drop in luminous flux The initial luminous flux of a new lamp decreases over its time of operation (lumen maintenance). 3. The rated luminous flux is measured at a standardised measurement temperature of 25 °C in units of lumen [lm]. Lamp manufacturers display this drop in luminous flux by curves. 5. The ratio of luminous flux to electrical power consumption gives the luminous efficiency [lm/W]. or the lower the colour rendition group number. or half the lamps have failed. In Chapter 8. the better the colour rendition in comparison with the optimum reference light. This test is subject to standardised operating conditions. Power The electrical power consumption of the lamp as opposed to the power consumption of a system comprising lamp and ballast. Lamp manufacturers display this failure rate by curves. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 3 . Colour rendition The spectral components of the light determine how well various object colours can be reproduced. 6. The higher the colour rendition index (Ra or CRI). they are shown as maintenance factors (LLWF). In Chapter 8. they are shown as maintenance factors (LSF).

7. important properties such as the luminous flux vs. Compact fluorescent lamps may usually be used in any burning position. temperature curve may vary with the position.and mercury-vapour lamps can be varied. The new series of special models for indoor and outdoor applications constitute an exception. however. because this may have uncontrollable effects on light quality and lamp service life. Dimming capability Besides incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps. are still not approved by the manufacturers for dimming. Metal halide lamps. 4 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook . The power of highpressure sodium. 9. For some metal halide lamps. Re-start High-pressure discharge lamps need to cool down for several minutes before they can be started again. only certain burning positions are allowed so as to avoid unstable operating states. Burning position Manufacturers specify the permitted burning positions for their lamps. 10. however. but only in discrete levels. Warm-up time Discharge lamps in particular need between 30 seconds and several minutes to warm up and output the full luminous flux. 8. nowadays all fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can also be dimmed over almost any range.

just as in incandescent lamps. Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precise direction of light. These lamps therefore generate a relatively large amount of heat. but do require a transformer. than incandescent lamps restaurants and – Easy to dim catering How they work Current flows through a filament and heats it up. The halogen cycle increases the efficiency and extends the service life compared with traditional incandescent lamps.The main lamp types QR-CBC QT12 QR111 H a l o g e n l a m p s QT32 QT-DE QPAR51 QPAR64 Halogen lamps – For mains and low-voltage – Brilliant light operation – Excellent colour rendition – Longer service life and – Applications: retail higher luminous efficiency and domestic areas. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 5 .

and operate in a very similar way. 6 / Chapter 4 . f l u o re s c e n t l a m p s TC-DEL TC-TEL(I) TC-TEL(I) TC-L C o m p a c t Compact fluorescent lamps – Compact designs – Applications: commer– High luminous efficiency cial and high-profile – Excellent colour rendition interiors. The lamps need a starting aid and a current limiting device. The luminous flux depends on the burning position and temperature.l a m p s T16/T26 T16-R T16-R F l u o re s c e n t Fluorescent lamps – High to very high luminous efficiency (in particular T16 HE) – Good to excellent colour rendition – Long service life – Extensive range of types – Dimmable – Application: economically efficient widearea lighting How they work An alternating electric field generates invisible UV radiation between the two electrodes in the discharge tube. This radiation is converted into high-quality visible light in the fluorescent material. usually combined in an electronic ballast. The luminous flux is highly dependent on the ambient temperature. restaurants – Extensive range of types and catering – Dimmable The Lighting Handbook How they work These lamps are compact versions of the linear or circular fluorescent lamps.

Practical electronic ballasts are also available for low-power lamps. retail areas How they work In metal halide lamps.lamps HIT-TC-CE HIT-CE HIT-DE-CE HIT-DE HIE HIT Metal halide lamps – High luminous efficiency – Good to excellent colour rendition – High colour stability for ceramic discharge-tube lamps halide Metal – Cannot be dimmed – Applications: industrial bays. The composition of the materials in the tube determines the light quality. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 7 . floodlighting. spotlighting. a highly compact electric arc is produced in a discharge tube. and the current must be limited by a ballast. A starter is needed to switch on the lamp.

so the light is yellowish and only suitable for special applications. and the current must be limited by a ballast. A starter is usually needed to switch on the lamp. although it provides a far poorer light quality.va p o u r Sodium vapour lamps – High luminous efficiency and long service life – Satisfactory to poor colour rendition – Can be dimmed in discrete steps – Applications: industrial bays. Mercury vapour lamps – No starter. . The lamps can be started at mains voltage. and so only need a ballast for current limiting. street lighting HST-CRI HSE HST l a m p s S o d i u m Colour-improved (Philips SDW): – Excellent colour rendition – Warm light – Long service life – Application: retail areas How they work The discharge in the linearly extended ceramic discharge tube is defined by sodium. The colour-improved SDW lamp by Philips is a popular choice for lighting retail areas. street lighting HME Mercury vapour lamps 8 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook How they work The high-pressure mercury vapour lamp is actually the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp. just ballast required – Satisfactory to poor colour rendition – Can be dimmed in discrete steps – Applications: industrial bays.

LMG-IHf I n d u c t i o n QL – By Philips only – 55 W. just as in fluorescent lamps. This produces UV radiation which is then converted into visible light by fluorescent material. 85 W and 165 W – Excellent colour rendition – Very long service life – Rotationally symmetrical light distribution – Applications: areas where it is difficult to replace lamps. Systems have a very long service life because the only parts subject to wear are in these ballasts. retail. The amalgam technology used in these lamps makes their luminous flux only very slightly temperature-dependent. indoor and outdoor public areas l a m p s How they work A high-frequency electromagnetic field is coupled into the glass bulb via an antenna protruding into the bulb. commercial and industrial interiors. The lamps can only be operated using special electronic ballasts by Philips. As yet there are no dimmable electronic ballasts available. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 9 .

They can be dimmed easily. a large variety of different colours are produced directly. White light can only be produced using fluorescent materials from blue LEDs or by mixing RGB. backlighting of advertising signs. Today. Depending on the materials used. innovative lighting solutions.Wire bond Bubble LED chip Board LED (EOS P214 by TRIDONIC. L i g h t 10 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook . The active semiconductor layer. showcase and shelf lighting How they work Light emitting diodes are modern semiconductor devices. escape sign luminaires. LED modules are supplied with power via appropriate converters with safety extra-low voltage.ATCO) e m i t t i n g d i o d e s ( L E D s ) Light emitting diodes (LEDs) – Each manufacturer uses own technology – Highly efficient direct generation of coloured light – Huge potential as the light source of the future – Applications: decorative indoor and outdoor applications. 250 μm (1 micrometre = 1 one-thousandth of a millimetre). in which radiation is produced. visual guidance systems. The LEDs’ very long service life of several 10. is sandwiched between a positive and a negative substrate. the smallest chips have a side length of approx. Rapid increases in efficiency at a simultaneous fall in prices open up bright perspectives for the future.000 hours can only be achieved when overheating is avoided (thermal management). Their properties are determined by the materials used as well as the mechanical design.

Luminous flux – temperature curve As for all fluorescent lamps. the maximum value therefore lies above this rated value. Thus luminaire efficiencies may have levels greater than “1”. For the T16. The T16 basically follows the same curve as the T26. % 100 80 60 40 20 T26 36 W T26 58 W T16 -20 0 20 40 60 80 °C Ambient temperature The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 11 . modern T16 lamps (diameter: 16 mm) show several different properties that must be taken into account for application. Reason: The cool spot of T16 is not located in the centre of the lamp. The rated luminous flux is generally specified for an ambient temperature of 25 °C. with losses increasing at higher and lower temperatures. but typically at one end of the tube where the manufacturer has fixed its seal. the lamp’s luminous flux is temperature-dependent. The maximum value is obtained at an optimum ambient temperature. 1.Application notes T16 fluorescent lamps In comparison with thicker T26 lamps (diameter: 26 mm). but the maximum occurs not at an ambient temperature of 20 to 25 °C but at about 35 °C.

an appropriately adjusted planned luminous flux has to be calculated. 12 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook . the lamps’ luminous flux is also affected. the so-called Cool Spot Optimizer (CSO) may be used. The CSO effects a temperature increase at the lamp by approx. 60 % ␩LB approx. 90 % In the above example. and must be fitted at the lamp end (see picture). Example: FZ 1/54 without CSO at 0 °C FZ 1/54 with CSO at 0 °C ␩LB approx. owing to the CSO. The CSO may only be used in conventional T16 28/54 W and/or 35/49/80 W lamps using cold-spot technology. Where a different ambient temperature prevails. resulting in a corresponding shift to the left of the T16 curve displayed (page 11). In order to increase the efficiency of luminaires fitted with T16 lamps. In fluorescent lamps. 10 to 20 degrees. the luminous flux declines in particular at lower temperatures. CSO – Cool Spot Optimizer The photometric data of luminaires typically apply to a standard temperature of 25 °C. the luminous flux produced is therefore increased by 50 % and the number of luminaires required is reduced by one third. For lighting design purposes.2.

Also. To ensure perfect operation. This may have a negative impact on the lamp service life. For cool environments. In general. This is the period immediately after the lamps are switched on for the first time. single-lamp normal ambient temperature multi-lamp cool ambient temperature The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 13 . these should be burnt in over a minimum period of 30–60 minutes without dimming or switching them. lamp ends should always have the same orientation i. and where lamps are positioned vertically.3. even exhibiting flickering at low dimming levels. 4.e. one should allow a period of 2 to 4 days of operation without dimming or switching. they should preferably also be at the bottom. Unstabilised lamps may differ in brightness and light colour. when the initially encapsulated mercury is vaporised and evenly distributed in the lamp. Ageing/burning in Brand new lamps stabilise during the ageing phase. particularly in dimming installations. in multi-lamp luminaires they should lie next to each other. Lamp orientation Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being identical in design. it may make sense – depending on the type of luminaire – to arrange the lamp/s differently. before assessing a lighting installation’s illuminance level and lighting quality using already aged lamps. it matters how one or more lamps are fitted in the luminaires.

should be turned so as to make the lamp end head towards the centre of the luminaire. The so-called TETRIS arrangement provides for lamps overlapping several centimetres. single-lamp twin-lamp In a continous-row lighting system. For cool environments.and twin-lamp The Lighting Handbook . This enables to compensate for the dark zone at the lamp’s ends.Further details for TETRIS and continuous row arrangements: Particular attention is needed for special lamp arrangements like in TETRIS (TECTON or SLOT luminaires) or in continous-row lighting systems. it is recommended to also align all lamps identically. single. The last lamp/s. In order to provide for maximum uniformity.and twin-lamp 14 / Chapter 4 single. however. here too it may make sense to arrange the lamp/s differently. if possible. the maximum total luminous flux will be achieved if the lamp ends are placed next to each other.

ballast Option 1 2/36 W Number of luminaires 8 Max. ballast Option 2: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire.0 W/m2/100 lx 91 % 73 % 10 % The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 15 . height = 3 m Reflection factors: ceiling = 70 %. walls = 50 %. width = 6 m. matt louvre. lamp luminous efficiency 93 lm/W Power consumption per m2 per 100 lx 2. 2/36 W electr.2 W/m2/100 lx Luminaire efficiency 85 % Utilization factor 66 % Energy saving Option 2 2/28 W 8 104 lm/W 2.A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26 Advantages of T16 fluorescent lamps – Reduction in the lamp diameter by about 40 % – Higher optical efficiencies possible – Improved luminous efficiency – Improved luminaire efficiencies from the shift in the luminous-flux peak – Standardised luminance levels for all lamp lengths for high-efficiency lamps – Larger range of types makes it easier to meet lighting requirements more closely Summary type comparison (selection): T16 Length Power Rated luminous flux (25 °C) 549 mm 14 W 1200 lm 24 W 1750 lm 849 mm 21 W 1900 lm 39 W 3100 lm 1149 mm 28 W 2600 lm 54 W 4450 lm 1449 mm 35 W 3300 lm 49 W 4300 lm 80 W 6150 lm T26 Length Power Rated luminous flux (25 °C) 590 mm 18 W 1350 lm 895 mm 30 W 1200 mm 36 W 1500 mm 58 W 2350 lm 3350 lm 5200 lm Example of interior lighting using T16 and T26 Room dimensions: length = 8 m. matt louvre. floor = 20 % Required maintenance value of illuminance: 500 lx Option 1: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire. 2/28 W electr.

+5 to +70 °C. This helps to somewhat mitigate the sharp drop at higher or lower temperatures. Other amalgam without amalgam TC-T. The tables provide an overview of those major manufacturers’ lamps in the TC-T design (three-fold double tube) that have added amalgam. DULUX T/E • • • • • Philips 2-pin PL-T 2p Philips 4-pin PL-T 4p GE 2-pin BIAX T Sylvania 2-pin Lynx CF-T • • • • • • • • • • • • • • with amalgam TC-TI. ensuring that more than 90 % of the maximum luminous flux is achieved over a wide temperature range of approx. Amalgam lamps The strong temperature dependence of the luminous flux of traditional fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can be compensated by adding amalgam (mercury compound). the light level still falls off sharply. however. TC-QELI 13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W 60 W 70 W 85 W 120 W Osram 2-pin DULUX T IN Osram 4-pin DULUX T/E IN DULUX HO CONSTANT Philips 2-pin PL-T TOP 2p Philips 4-pin PL-T TOP 4p PL-H GE 4-pin BIAX T/E BIAX Q/E Sylvania 4-pin Lynx CF-TE • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The Lighting Handbook • • • • 16 / Chapter 4 .Application notes Compact fluorescent lamps 1. TC-TE models can be 13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W found in the Osram 2-pin DULUX T • • • T16 and TC-L Osram 4-pin designs. Above and below this range. TC-TELI.

downlights). Standard types have a cool spot in the exposed lamp bend. it is therefore recommended to fit the lamps with electrodes uppermost wherever possible. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 17 . In compact luminaires with horizontal lamp arrangement (e. in which the electrodes are arranged diagonally. Since the lamp end does not allow consistent identification of the electrode position.g. the cool spot lies in the lamp base. Either possible orientation of these lamps is equivalent. Lamp orientation The luminous flux from compact fluorescent lamps is highly dependent on the burning position.2. The exception to this is the PHILIPS PL-T. In amalgam lamps. so that self-heating and convection may lead to a temperature rise here. Luminaire efficiency can be maximised by fitting the lamps properly in the luminaires. that lamp side on which adjacent tubes are not connected should be placed uppermost – these are the two tube ends containing the internal electrodes.

g. The higher operating current then leads to higher luminous flux levels for the same lamps together with a slightly altered light quality. outer protective coating). Service life characteristics The average lamp service life (lamp survival factor) and the reduction in luminous flux (lamp luminous flux maintenance factor) can vary markedly in some of the different lamp types. COPA I 1/400 HIE) and with ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps (e. In both cases suitable starters are required. Continued use may lead to damage of lamps and control gear and consequently of luminaires! 18 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook . The detailed information from the manufacturer must be observed without fail. resulting in different electrical operating values. 3. integral safety tube. COPA I 1/400 HSE). Ballasts The manufacturers of metal halide lamps use a range of operating principles.g. 2. With these high-pressure discharge lamps in particular. They also depend on the switching frequency and the position of use. Glass covers In general. Once again the detailed data from the manufacturer must be taken into account. It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to decide whether to permit individual lamp types to be used in uncovered luminaires. it is important to replace the lamps at the designated end of their service life (maintenance interval) at the latest. Some lamps are therefore approved for operation both with ballasts for metal halide lamps (e. metal halide lamps require a glass cover to protect people and property in the event of the lamp exploding. The maintenance factor tables in Chapter 8 contain some typical values.Application notes Metal halide lamps 1.g. Suitable safety devices are installed in the lamps for this purpose (e.

000 h 12.500 lm 25.800 lm 3.000 h 6. .000 h 12.000 h 20.200 K 5.500 K/6.The Lighting Handbook OSRAM HQI-E HQI-E/P HQI-T 250 W/D Tube mini G 22 any no 20.100 lm Colour temperature 5.700 K 4.400 K 4.000 lm 18.500 K/6.000 K/5.500 lm 3. flux Ellipsoid E 40 any no Ellipsoid E 40 any yes Tube E 40 any no Ellipsoid E 40 any no Tube E 40 any no 12.000 lm 24.000 lm 4.000 lm 20.000 h 12.400 K 4.000 K Colour rendition 90 90 90 88 index Ra 24.000 K 90 Chapter 4 / 19 25.500 lm 4.000 h Ellipsoid E 40 pendant ±15° no Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° yes 250 W/D 250 W/D PHILIPS HCI-E HCI-T HCI-TM HPI-PLUS HPI-Plus HPI-T PLUS POWERBALL POWERBALL POWERBALL 745/767 BU 745/767 BU-P 645 250 W/WDL 250 W/WDL 250 W/WDL 250 W 250 W 250 W Tube E 40 pendant ±20° no 20. For reliable information and data on other lamp types.500 K 70 70 65 Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 W Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI) Luminous flux not permitted not permitted not permitted not permitted Colour temperature Colour rendition index Ra Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 19.200 K 5.300 K 3.000 h Design Base Burning position Approved for operation in uncovered luminaires Average service life Reduction in lumin.000 K 70 70 65 All data subject to change.000 h 12.700 K 4.000 lm 20.500 lm 25.000 lm 17.000 K 89 25.000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 “Calculation of economic efficiency” not permitted not permitted 18.000 K/5. please refer to the manufacturer’s data.

000 lm 40.100 K Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 58 90 Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 30.000 h 20.500 K/6.000 K 70 65 HQI-E HQI-E/P HQI-E HQI-BT HQI-T 400 W/D 400 W/D 400 W/N 400 W/D 400 W/N (clear) Design Base Burning position Approved for operation in uncovered luminaires Average service life Reduction in luminous flux Ellipsoid E40 any no Ellipsoid E40 any yes Ellipsoid E40 any no Tube E40 any no Tube E40 horizontal ±45° no 12.800 K 70 70 32.000 lm 27.000 h 20.500 K 4. please refer to the manufacturer’s data.500 K/6.000 h 12.500 K 70 65 42.100 K 5.700 K 6.700 K 4.900 K 4.400 K 3.500 lm 4.000 h 12.000 h 12.000 lm 4.800 K 5. For reliable information and data on other lamp types.000 K/5.000 lm Colour temperature 5.000 lm Colour temperature 5.200 K Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 64 90 39.500 lm 30.000 lm 4.000 h Ellipsoid E40 horizontal ±20° no Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° yes Tube E40 horizontal ±20° no PHILIPS HPI PLUS 400 W 743 HOR HPI PLUS 400 W 745/767 BU-P HPI-T PLUS 400 W 645 Characteristics of metal halide lamps 400 W 20 / Chapter 4 32.500 lm 35.OSRAM HPI PLUS 400 W 745/767 BU Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° no 20.000 h 12.100 K >60 Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI) Luminous flux 26.700 K 4.500 lm 35.000 lm 3.500 lm 42.000 lm 25.000 K/5.000 K 4.400 K 4.000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 “Calculation of economic efficiency” 33.000 lm 33.000 h 20.000 lm 4.000 lm 4.800 K >65 All data subject to change. The Lighting Handbook .000 lm 35.000 lm 31.300 K 70 70 42.

FQ /840 HO FQ /830 HO CONSTANT FH /67 HE.4 pin --- 15–58 W L /830 T26-LL Fluorescent lamp Ø 26 mm long service life 15–58 W T8 Luxline Plus F /830 --Mini-Lynx T /E27 Lynx-S Lynx-DE Lynx-TE Lynx-LE --- TC-TSE 5–30 W Lamp descriptions acc./low-loss/electr.The Lighting Handbook LBS code Description Philips GE Sylvania System power Osram Fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps T16 /840 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm light colour 840 Starcoat T5 F/T5/840 ----------T5 Luxline Plus FHE/840. light colour 830 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm blau 14–80 W T16-R(I) 22–60 W FH /840 HE.4 Pin Biax T/E . FHO/840 --- 14–80 W T16-I /830 24–120 W T16-bu Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm amalgam techn. to LBS (ZVEI) – TC-S MASTER PL-C 4 Pin 5–11 W MASTER TL-D Super 80 /830 --MASTER TL-D Xtra/Xtreme DULUX EL E27 MASTER PL Electronic DULUX S MASTER PL-S 2 Pin TC-DEL 10–26 W DULUX D/E TC-TELI 13–70 W DULUX T/E IN a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions TC-L --- 18–80 W DULUX L MASTER PL-T TOP 4 Pin MASTER PL-L 4 Pin Chapter 4 / 21 TC-LI Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) with integral electr. GX24q 4-pin cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 2G11 4-pin cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 42G11 4-pin cap amalgam techn. ballast E27" screw-in cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 short double tube) only for conventional/low-loss ballast Compact fluorescent lamp (2 double tubes) G24q 4-pin cap for conv.2 pin Biax D/E . 40–80 W DULUX L CONSTANT .) Fluorescent lamp Ø 26 mm light colour 830 T8 Polylux XLR F /830 --Electronic Biax Biax S . FQ /67 HO FC MASTER TL5 HE/HO Super 80/840 MASTER TL5 HO/VHO TOP /830 TL5 HO Coloured Pro MASTER TL5C T26 /830 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm circular (partly amalgam techn. ballasts Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) amalgam techn.4 Pin Biax L .

20–100 W 12 mm axial filament low-pressure system Low-pressure 12 V QR-CBC51 LV halogen incandescent lamp with 20–65 W cold-light specular reflector Ø 51 mm and glass cover QR111 /24° LV halogen incandescent lamp with 35–100 W reflector Ø 111 mm Radiation angle 24° HALOSPOT 111 FL Aluline Pro 111 24D The Lighting Handbook . 60–250 W tube-shaped Ø 32 mm frosted outside Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 60–2000 W QT-DE12 voltage.. 15–100 W R80 Incandescent reflector lamp Ø 80 mm 40–100 W PAR38 Parabolic incandescent reflector lamp 60–120 W Ø 38/8" = approx.35 --Tubular FR K /Q T3/CL Precise MR16 /CG SUPERIA 50 AR111 12V FL --- --ENDURA CLASSIC A CL CONCENTRA R80 CONCENTRA Standard A55 CL Reflector NR80 PAR38 PAR38 HALOPAR 16 GU10 Twistline Pro Alu HALOLUX CERAM HALOLINE HALOSTAR DECOSTAR Induction lamps LMG-IHf Ball-shaped induction lamp 55–165 W LMG-SIHf Double-tube induction lamp 70–150 W Incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps A60 /c Incandescent GLS lamp Ø 60 mm transp.LBS code GE ----A1/CL/E27 R80/E27 PAR38/E27 Q MR16 HI-SPOT ES 50 DLX-T Tube satin halogen rod Halogen Axial Normal E27 transp. R80 PAR38 ----- Description Philips Sylvania MASTER QL --- System power Osram Lamp descriptions acc. cap at both sides Ø 12 mm QT12-ax-LP LV halogen incandescent lamp Ø approx. to LBS (ZVEI) – a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions 22 / Chapter 4 HalogenA Pro E27 AM Plusline Pro Capsuleline Pro STARLITE Brilliantline Pro Dichroic Q T3/12V GY6.35 GY6. Refl. with parabolic aluminium reflector Ø 51 mm GU10 cap QT32 /m Halogen incandescent lamp for mains volt. 122 mm QPAR51 /GU10 Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 35–50 W voltage.

GX12 cap HST-MF High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp. CMH/TC CMI-TC CMI-TD UVS Britelux HSI-SX/P --ConstantColor CMH /T/UVC CMI-T UVS Arcstream ARC/T HSI-T Kolorlux Standard HSL-BW Description Philips GE Sylvania System power Osram HQL HQI-T High-pressure discharge lamps HME High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 50–1000 W ellipsoidal HIT Metal halide lamp. tube-shaped. colour-improved. reduced UV radiation HIT-TC-CE Metal halide lamp. HCI-TC PB HIT-DE-CE HCI-TS Lamp descriptions acc. cap at 70–250 W both sides. 18–180 W tube-shaped Chapter 4 / 23 SOX . CDM-Elite-TC MASTER Colour CDM-TD MASTER HPI Plus BU-P ConstantColor CMH /TD/UVC --- --- a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions NAV-T SUPER MASTER SON-T Pro Lucalox LU /HO/T/40 SHP-TS MASTER SOX --SLP Metal halide lamp.The Lighting Handbook LBS code HPL-N --MASTER Colour CDM-T SuperMini CMH/T. increased luminous flux Low-pressure discharge lamps LST Low-pressure sodium-vapour lamp. tube-shaped. tube-shaped. ellipsoidal. with quartz 70–400 W discharge tube and anti-burst tube for open luminaires HST-CRI GX12 High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp. compact design HCI-T HCI-TF PB. with ceramic discharge tube HIE-P Metal halide lamp. 50–1000 W tube-shaped. tube-shaped. with 35–150 W quartz discharge tube HIT-CE UVr Metal halide lamp. with 20–70 W ceramic discharge tube. with 35–250 W ceramic discharge tube. CDM-TC. to LBS (ZVEI) – HQI-E/P MASTER SDW-TG --- MASTER Colour CDM-Tm. 50–100 W tube-shaped.

200 1.350 3.000 approx.750 4.000 72 24.850 6. nw ww.000 74 24. nw ww.000 89 16–20.000 88 24.000 80 24.000 93 20–24.000 74 20–24.950 3.000 76 20–24. nw ww.000 84 20–24. el ect r on i c b al l as t 24 / Chapter 4 System Lamp power service life* in W in h System power in W Max.000 approx. nw ww.900 1.200 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) The Lighting Handbook .000 81 20–24. nw ww. nw ww. nw ww.400 4.750 2.000 93 20–24.300 9. nw ww. nw ww.000 71 12.ma g n e t i c l ow.450 6.l o s s b. nw ww.100 4. 77 24.800 7. nw ww. nw ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 GX5 GX5 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 G13 G13 G13 1. nw ww.000 5. nw ww.600 3. 88 27 46 54 61 approx.000 90 20–24. 130 26 45–47 60 66 19–20 36 54–57 20–24. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h Lamp name Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) Fluorescent lamps T 16 14 W T 16 21 W T 16 24 W T 16 28 W T 16 35 W T 16 39 W T 16 49 W T 16 54 W T 16 80 W T16-I 24 W T16-I 39 W T16-I 49 W T16-I 54 W T16-I 80 W T16-I 95 W T16-I 120 W T 16-R 22 W T 16-R 40 W T 16-R 55 W T 16-R 60 W T 26 18 W T 26 36 W T 26 58 W 25 42 66 13.150 1.000 87 20–24. 71 12.800 3. nw ww.000 76 16–20. 70 24. nw ww. nw ww. nw ww.200 4.000 13.000 approx. nw ww. 105 approx.000 68 16–20.000 1.000 69 12.000 93 Characteristic values of the major lamps ww.300 3.000 82 24. nw ww.000 67 12. 88 approx.300 4.350 5.200 1.000 13.000 16–18 24 27 31–33 39–41 46 54 61 approx. nw ww. nw ww. nw ww.

000 8. nw TC-LI 40 W ww. nw TC-L 55 W ww. nw TC-TEL(I) 57 W ww. nw TC-L 18 W ww.200 1. nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 26 W ww.000 8.000 10.000 12 14 18–20 28 14 18–20 28 35–36 46–47 62 65 75 92 128 19 25–27 34–39 45 55–61 85 45 55–61 85 10. nw TC-D/-DEL 18 W ww.800 2.000 10.000 50 64 66 64 64 66 64 68 69 69 62 70 65 70 63 72 85 77 87 71 78 87 71 Chapter 4 / 25 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) .800 900 1.000 10. nw TC-L 40 W ww.000 8.000 10.The Lighting Handbook ma g n e t i c l ow.000 8.300 4.000 10.500 4. nw TC-TELI/-QELI 120 W ww.000 10. nw TC-TELI 60 W ww.000 10. nw TC-TELI 85 W ww. nw TC-LI 55 W ww. system luservice life* minous efficiency in h in lm/W Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) Compact fluorescent lamps TC-D/-DEL 10 W ww.200 6.000 10. nw TC-D/-DEL 26 W ww.900 3.200 1.500 4.000 10. nw TC-LI 80 W ww.000 8.800 2. nw TC-D/-DEL 13 W ww.000 10. nw 25 30 42 8.000 20.000 10.200 1.000 20.000 10.000 20.000 5.000 10.000 10.000 Colour Colour rendition Base temperature index Ra System power in W Lamp Max. nw TC-TEL(I) 42 W ww. nw TC-L 24 W ww.000 10.800 6. nw TC-L 36 W ww.000 Characteristic values of the major lamps ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 G24d-1/q-1 G24d-1/q-1 G24d-2/q-2 G24d-3/q-3 GX24d-1/q-1 GX24d-2/q-2 GX24d-3/q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 GX24q-5 2G8 GX24q-6 2G8 2G8 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 600 900 1.l o s s b.000 10. nw TC-L 80 W ww.800 6.000 10.000 1. nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 13 W ww.400 3. el ect r on i c b al l as t Lamp name System Lamp power service life* in W in h 15 17 23 31 17 23 31 8. nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 18 W ww.000 9.000 8.000 3.000 8. nw TC-TEL(I) 32 W ww.000 8.000 10.200 4. nw TC-TELI 70 W ww.000 10.

000 3.400 4.550–3. el ect r on i c b al l as t 26 / Chapter 4 System Lamp power service life* in W in h 55 85 165 4.3 GU5.35 GY6.650 6. nw LMG-IHf 85 W (QL 85 W) ww.000 60.100–6.000 64 71 73 16 18 16 18 10 10 14 16 19 14 16 16 Lamp name System power in W Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) Max.500 2.500 1.000 4. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 Special Special Special 3.35 GU5.ma g n e t i c l ow-l o s s b.000 2. nw Low-voltage halogen lamps QT 12 35 W ww QT 12 50 W ww QR-CBC 51 35 W (8–60°) ww QR-CBC 51 50 W (8–60°) ww QR 111 75 W (8–45°) ww QR 111 100 W (8–45°) ww High-voltage halogen lamps QT-DE 12 150 W L 114.430 2.000 2.000 **1. The Lighting Handbook .000 2.700–30.000 Induction lamps LMG-IHf 55 W (QL 55 W) ww.000 3.3 G53 G53 600 930 **700–14.000 2.000 1. nw LMG-IHf 165 W (QL 165 W) ww.000 9.000 **2.200 5.300 12.000 4.000 60.000 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) ** Axial luminous intensity in cd.000 4.000 Characteristic values of the major lamps ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 R7s R7s R7s E27 E27 E27 2.2 ww QT-DE 12 300 W ww QT-DE 12 500 W ww QT 32 100 W matt ww QT 32 150 W matt ww QT 32 250 W matt ww ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 GY6.800–48.000 **850–15.000 60.

000 6–12. ≥80 E27 5.000 6.500 44–46 9.300–8.500 44–46 9.000 275–285 6.000 ≥90.000 ≥90.065 6.000 ≥90.000 6. system luservice life* minous efficiency in h in lm/W Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) 72 ca.000 6. nw ww.000 9–12.000 ≥80.000 ≥80 E40 24. ≥70 E27 10. ≥60 E40 17.000 ≥80.000 ≥90. nw ww.500 270 12.5 3. nw ww.000 ≥90. ≥70. nw ww. ≥70 E27 4.000 ≥90.500–9.400–7. ≥70 E27 7.000 Colour Colour rendition Base temperature index Ra System power in W Lamp Max.700 ≥90. el ect r on i c b al l as t Lamp name System Lamp power service life* in W in h 80–83 172 6.500 170 9–12.000 ≥80 E27 8.000–21. ≥80 G12 6.000 82–96 6.300 82–96 9. ≥80 PGJ5/G8.300 82–96 9.000 6–12. nw ww.100–3. nw ww ww.000 ≥80 G12 14. tw ww ww.000 Metal halide lamps HIE 70 W HIE 100 W HIE 150 W HIE 250 W HIE 400 W HIE 1. nw ww.500–12.000 168–177 6. 24 42–45 80–83 42–45 80–83 172 9–12.000–6.500 120 12. ≥80 G8.000 ≥90. 160 80–83 172 ca. ≥60 E40 20. ≥60 E40 19.200–5.000 9–12.500–43.000 9–12.050–1.500 82–96 6.000 168–177 6.000 9–12.000 ≥80 G12 13.800 272 6–12.500 275–285 6.000 W HIE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 100 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) HIT 70 W HIT 150 W HIT 250 W HIT-TC-CE 20 W (Ceramic) HIT-TC-CE 35 W (Ceramic) HIT-TC-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 35 W (Ceramic)) HIT-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 150 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 250 W (Ceramic) Characteristic values of the major lamps ww. nw ww. nw ≥80.000 63 72 74 93 93 90 83 71 84 91 69 77 76 71 83 91 83 83 83 96 Chapter 4 / 27 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) .000–8. nw.000 ≥90. nw nw.5 6. ≥80 G12 3.5/GU6.000–13.615–1.000 400–460 6.000–25. tw nw ww. ≥80 E27 12.5 1.000 9–12. nw ww.000 ≥90.300–7. tw nw.900–5.000–25. nw ww.000 85 9–12. nw ww ww.000–3. ≥80 E40/G22/G12 23.000 ≥80 PGJ5/G8.100 112–115 6. ≥70.000 7.000 ≥80 G12 5.000 1.000 ≥60 E40 95. ≥70.The Lighting Handbook ma g n e t i c l ow-l o s s b.500 168–177 6.

000 10.300–2.000–32.000–54.000 22. ≥20 E40 36.400 ≥80 PG12-1/GX12-1 4. nw High-pressure sodium vapour lamps HSE 250 W ww HSE 400 W ww HST-CRI 35 W (SDW-T) ww HST-CRI 50 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww HST-CRI 100 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww HST 250 W ww HST 400 W ww 275–285 440–450 41–42 62 114–116 275 440–450 10.ma g n e t i c l ow. nw HIT-DE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) ww.000 11.700–7.000 12. The Lighting Handbook .000–33.000 ≥60.000 8.l o s s b.000 6.000 7–15.000 6.000 82–96 168–177 275–285 40–46 89–95 168–177 275 266–270 425 8. ≥20 E40 23.000 ≥60.000 13. please refer to the Technical Appendix of the ZUMTOBEL product catalogue. ≥70 ≥90. In case of doubt.000 10.000 ≥60.000–56.000 112 120 31 39 42 116 123 Characteristic values of the major lamps ≥60. ≥80 ≥90.000 Metal halide lamps HIT-DE 70 W ww. ≥80.500 ≥40 ≥40 E40 E40 13.000 3. tw HIT-DE 250 W ww.000 62 112 10. nw.000 ≥80 PG12-1 1. ≥80 ≥90.500 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) For an extensive table of lamp data. nw HIT-DE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) ww High-pressure mercury vapour lamps HME 250 W ww. tw HIT-DE-CE 35 W (Ceramic) ww HIT-DE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) ww.000 10.000 6. All data without engagement.250 20.000 6.500–14.000–6. ≥80 ≥80 RX7s RX7s Fc2 RX7s RX7s RX7s Fc2 5.000 6. ≥20 E40 37. nw. el ect r on i c b al l as t 28 / Chapter 4 System Lamp power service life* in W in h 80–83 172 42–45 80–83 172 10.000 10.000 75 75 72 85 79 80 89 48 51 Lamp name System power in W Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) Max.000 12–15.900–5.200–3. please contact the lamp manufacturer. ≥20 E40 22.000 10.300 ≥80 PG12-1/GX12-1 2. nw HIT-DE 150 W ww. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h ≥90.200 24.400 5.000 7.000 10.000 10. ≥80. nw HME 400 W ww.000 12. ≥70 ≥80 ≥90.000 10.

low loss (low-loss ballast) Magnetic ballasts. the European Union has adopted the energy classification system (Directive 2000/55/EU on energy efficiency requirements for ballasts for fluorescent lamps). Example for T26 36 W 840: EEI A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D ≤ 19 W (25 % dimming is equivalent to 50 % A3) ≤ 36 ≤ 38 ≤ 41 ≤ 43 ≤ 45 ≤ 45 Chapter 4 / 29 The Lighting Handbook . The EEI (Energy Efficiency Index) classifies ballasts into seven categories: Class A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D Ballasts Dimmable electronic ballasts Reduced-loss electronic ballasts Electronic ballasts Magnetic ballasts. moderate loss (conventional ballast) Magnetic ballasts. class C ballasts have ceased to be produced since 21 November 2005 at the latest. very low loss (low-loss ballast) Magnetic ballasts. very high loss (conventional ballast) Since 21 May 2002.Energy efficiency of luminaires Most of the electrical power is consumed in the lamp and its control gear. In order to clarify the power consumption of the ballast/lamp system. it has been prohibited to sell class D ballasts.

ZUMTOBEL names
• • •

DOD

DALI

DALI only

DSI

1–10 V

Heavy-duty e.b. Electr. ballast

Overview of electronic ballasts

30 / Chapter 4
• • Luminaires can be dimmed collectively No readdressing required when replacing control gear Luminaires can be dimmed collectively Can be used with some reservations in emergency lighting installations Long service life up to 1,000,000 h Ambient temperatures up to 70°C Integral over-/ undervoltage identification • • • • Long lamp service life High-quality light thanks to high-frequency operation More application options owing to DC operation Faulty lamps automatically switched off and switched on again after lamp replacement

• •

Switchable at zero power Dimmability subsequently enabled Dimmability DALI-addressable Configurable Error and status feedback Dimming automatically blocked in DC mode Emergency lighting level adjustable for DC mode Emergency lighting-compatible DC mode Critical operating conditions

• • • • • •

• • • • • • •

• • • •

Special features

DALI-switchable Dimming function can be enabled subsequently via Litenet

Addressability: Addressability: individual individual dimming dimming Flexible grouping Flexible grouping without rewiring without rewiring Luminaire status Luminaire status feedback feedback DSI control also possible

For detailed information on ambient conditions and conditions of use, please refer to the product data sheets.

The Lighting Handbook

Power consumption –20 % to –88 %

Energy saving at normal operation Set-AC
compared with conventional ballasts 20 % to 88 % at 1 % dimming level (off)

function of dimmer setting

55–8 W P C A 69 W 8W

Power consumption as a

55 W 45 W 35 W 25 W 8W

8W 1%

100 % 75 % 50 % 25 % Conventional ballast Controlled by LUXMATE Dimmer setting

9:00

10:00

11:00

12:00

13:00

14:00

15:00

16:00

Power requirement of a traditional freestanding luminaire

Potential energy savings using daylight sensors and presence detectors
up to 70 % compared with constant light e.g. freestanding luminaire using SensControl

Power requirement of a freestanding luminaire using SensControl

absent
▼ ▼ ▼

absent

cloud cover
▼ ▼

increasing daylight

sufficient daylight

decreasing daylight

Light required in terms of ergonomics using SensControl

Set-DC 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 further potential saving of 27 % 10 0 59 53 48 43 39 35 30 28 AC-mode DC-mode potential energy saving of 52 % in (%)

Emergency lighting extra function in Tridonic PCA
Thanks to a reducible DC dimming level (Set-DC), the emergency lighting installation can be designed for reduced operation. At a luminous flux of 10 %, savings of up to 70 % are possible at DC operation.

The Lighting Handbook

22

17

12

Power (W) 10 at 230 V DC

Chapter 4 / 31

Overview of LED control gear
Cable length vs. active power for 24 V DC supply Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible. Cable cross-section/length:
Output 10 W 15 W 20 W 30 W 40 W 50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W 90 W 100 W 110 W Current 0.417 A 0.625 A 0.833 A 1.250 A 1.667 A 2.083 A 2.500 A 2.917 A 3.333 A 3.750 A 4.167 A 4.583 A Voltage 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 35.0 m 23.5 m 17.5 m 11.5 m 8.5 m 7.0 m 5.5 m 5.0 m 4.0 m 3.5 m 3.5 m 3.0 m 47.0 m 31.0 m 23.5 m 15.5 m 11.5 m 9.0 m 7.5 m 6.5 m 5.5 m 5.0 m 4.5 m 4.0 m 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 70.5 m 47.0 m 35.0 m 23.5 m 17.5 m 14.0 m 11.5 m 10.0 m 8.5 m 7.5 m 7.0 m 6.0 m 117.5 m 78.5 m 60.0 m 39.0 m 29.5 m 23.5 m 19.5 m 16.5 m 14.5 m 13.0 m 11.5 m 10.5 m

Please note: maximum voltage drop permissible = 0.7 V

RGB and dimming of LED luminaires For “dimming applications”, owing to partly high outputs and accordingly possible interferences with electromagnetic compatibility, other points must be taken into account: A: control unit to LED C004 amplifier The cable between control unit and amplifier (LED C004) may be up to 20 m long. Make sure that the minimum input voltage of the amplifier’s control input is at least 12 V. B: LED C004 amplifier to first LED luminaire C: control unit to LED luminaire/luminaire group In order to avoid interferences with electromagnetic compatibility, the use of shielded cables for the lead between control unit and LED luminaires is recommended for cables longer than 0.5 m. Even if cables are shielded, cables longer than 15 m may lead to electromagnetic compatibility interferences in highly sensitive areas.

32 / Chapter 4

The Lighting Handbook

D: mains unit to LED luminaire/luminaire group The maximum cable length between mains unit and last

LED luminaire is specified in the table. Control gear should possibly be placed next to the luminaires.

A C + Ch 1-3 Control unit e.g. C002, K211 – Ch 1 – Ch 2 – Ch 3 + – Mains unit 12/24 V e.g. K240 + Uin + Ch 1-3 – Uin Amplifier + Ch 1-3 e.g. LED C004 – Ch 1 – Ch 1 – Ch 2 – Ch 2 – Ch 3 – Ch 3 D

B

LED luminaire

Cable length for supplying current-controlled LEDs, switchable Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible. In each case, they relate to the last luminaire in a group. It is assumed that the control gear operates at max. capacity – for details, please refer to the control gear’s technical description. A minimum voltage of 4.5 V is assumed for each LED.

Please note: use copper cables. Cables must not be laid in parallel to mains/highvoltage conductors. Cable length for supplying current-controlled LEDs, dimmable PWM The max. cable length to a group’s last luminaire may be 13 m. The cable cross-section has to be > 0.25 mm2. For cables longer than 1.5 m, shielded cables have to be used.

The Lighting Handbook

Current for LED lum. 350 mA 700 mA

Cable cross-section/length 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 30.0 m 40.0 m 60.0 m 100.0 m 15.0 m 20.0 m 30.0 m 50.0 m

Chapter 4 / 33

Mains

24 V-DC

LED-mains unit On/Off Dimming

Monochrome LED luminaires, voltage controlled 24 V
LEDOS 24 V MICROS LED 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V

SYSTEMLED Flood

34 / Chapter 4
LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V

Mains

24 V-DC PWM

* These luminaires must be additionally supplied with 24 V DC supply voltage!

DALI/DSI/switchDIM Mains

K210

24 V-DC

LED-mains unit

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood*

24 V-DC PWM

LED-mains unit Max. 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear or max. 3 x control voltage 0–10 V

C001

SYSTEMLED Flood*

The Lighting Handbook

The Lighting Handbook

Mains

24 V-DC PWM

24 V RGB LED luminaires in dynamic colours
SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB PHAOS lighting tile

DALI Mains

K211

24 V-DC

LED-mains unit

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB

24 V-DC PWM

* These luminaires must be additionally supplied with 24 V DC supply voltage!

LED-mains unit 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear or 3 x control voltage 0–10 V SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB

C001

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB

PHAOS lighting tile

LED-mains unit

24 V-DC PWM

DALI

C003 SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB PHAOS lighting tile

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB

LED-mains unit 1 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear

24 V-DC PWM

C002

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB

SYSTEMLED Deco RGB

KAVA LED RGB

PHAOS lighting tile

Application C004 PWM amplifier for controlling LED objects with higher output
LEDOS 24 V mono/RGB

LED-mains unit PWM control signal (e.g. C001, C002, C003, K210, K211)

C004

Chapter 4 / 35

The C004 amplifier is used where the luminaire output is higher than the output power of the control unit used.

SYSTEMLED Deco mono/RGB

KAVA LED mono/RGB

PHAOS lighting tile

Autom. colour sequence Colour sequence can be selected with DALI, 0–10 V with sequencer

24 V-DC PWM

K211) 350 mA PWM Mains 350 mA PWM LEDOS B RGB 350 mA Dali K350 DALI RGB Constant-current converter LEDOS B RGB 350 mA The Lighting Handbook .Mains 350 mA LED mains unit (constant current) ORILED 350 mA PANOS S 100 LED 350 mA On/Off Automatic colour sequence with sequencer. C001. C003. current-controlled LED mains unit PWM control signal C350 PWM dimmer (e. C001. C002.g. DALI 0–10 V Dimming Monochrome 350 mA LED luminaires. currentcontrolled 36 / Chapter 4 ORILED 350 mA PANOS S 100 LED 350 mA PASO II RGB 350 mA PASO II RGB 350 mA Mains 350 mA PWM LEDOS B 350 mA PWM control signal (e.g. K210) LED mains unit (constant current) dimmable via PWM LEDOS B 350 mA Mains 24 V-DC 350 mA RGB LED luminaires in dynamic colours.

. . . . . Plug & play with ZBOX . . . . . . . Creative solutions with EMOTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building-wide with LITENET and PROFESSIONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Easy dimming with BASIC and DIMLITE . . . 3 4 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 15 16 – 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 5 Lighting and room management LUXMATE lighting management .

.

LUXMATE lighting management – The intelligent control system for individual rooms and throughout buildings Function Applications LUXMATE LITENET (based on TCP/IP and DALI) – Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Office building with high – Maximum flexibility owing to requirements in terms reconfiguration by software of flexibility. efficiency with extra functions (on demand) – OPC and BACnet interfaces with other building services and BMS – Optimised for TASK AREA concepts according to EN 12464 – Integration of ONLITE emergency lighting system – Customised control concepts LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (based on LUXMATE bus system) – Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Conference rooms – Interfaces to media technology – Office buildings – Integration of ONLITE – Shopping malls emergency lighting system – Museums – link to BMS and central – Industry maintenance LUXMATE EMOTION (based on DALI) – Presence-based/daylight-based control – Shops – Timer – Health & Care – Special luminaires: RGB. Tempura – Wellness – ACTIVE LIGHT lighting concepts – Control rooms – Flexibility of individual – Offices addressing/grouping – In the home ZBOX – Lighting scenes – RGB colour control – Nightlogic – Webtool The Lighting Handbook LUXMATE BASIC/DIMLITE (based on DSI/DALI) – Daylight-based – In the home – Infrared remote control unit – Small offices & – Standard switch components surgeries – No addressing. ergonomic com– Can be subsequently upgraded patibility and econ. group dimming – Commercial premises – Zero-power switching and dimming BASIC ZBOX EMOTION LITENET PROFESSIONAL – Hotels – Private dwellings – Shops Chapter 5 / 3 .

PCI-FOX electronic ballast 2. transformer. IR remote control unit The Lighting Handbook . 2 channels 2 or 4-channel multifunction Control Module name: momentary-action switch. select appropriate lamp control gear Lamps GLS lamps PAR lamps HV halogen incandescent lamps LV halogen incandescent lamps Fluorescent lamps LED High-pressure discharge lamps Dimming range 0–100 % 0–100 % 0–100 % 0–100 % 1–100 % 0–100 % cannot be dimmed All control gear with DALI/DSI control input Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA electronic dimmable transformer: 105 VA + 150 VA electronic dimmable ballast electronic dimmable LED converter 1 ch.. 1 channel./3 ch. with 1 light-level memory Daylight-based dimming. . presence detector.LUXMATE control unit Lamp control gear (electronic ballast. light sensor. presence detector momentary-action switch momentary-action switch..) Two steps to create your lighting solution Dimming with LUXMATE BASIC/DIMLITE 4 / Chapter 5 DALI DSI DALI-T DSI-T* DALI-TD DSI-TD* DALI-TLC DSI-TLC DIMLITE 4ch** (4-channel) DIMLITE 2CH** (2-channel) All modules available for installation in luminaire or recess into ceiling * also available as housing for installation in switch cabinet ** only available as housing for installation in switch cabinet 1. 1 channel Dimming. light sensor momentary-action switch Circle. select control funtion required Function Dimming.

105/150 VA Arguments for your customers Dimming using conventional momentary-action light switches and with dimming-level memory Chapter 5 / 5 – – – – – – Absolutely flicker-free dimming – Simple to operate using conventional momentary-action light switches – throughout – Hence ensures standardised design of light switches and sockets – Any number of momentary-action light switches can be connected in parallel – Dimming range: 1 to 100 % light Lamps can be started at any dimming level Suitable for all major lamp types Easy to install Insensitive to mains fluctuations and interference Components can be delivered separately or pre-fitted in the luminaire Dimming-level memory . length 100 m Conventional momentaryaction light switch Preset/Dia DSI phase dimmer. 25* Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL L N D1 PCA D2 12 11 10 9 230/240 V 50/60 Hz Conventional double momentary-action light switch On/Off Dimming Control line e.5 mm2. 25 DALI electronic ballast.The Lighting Handbook Lamp control gear Lamps User control units Control Units L N PE DSI electronic ballast. max. max. max. 25* max.g. 25 DALI transformer. max. 2 m D1 D2 TE Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps max. 300 VA LUXMATE BASIC DSI-TD or DALI-TD D phase dimmed phase neutral protective earth momentary-action switch input control line earth AC voltage * available on request LV halogen incandescent lamps max. Programming instructions for preset light level (Dia): • Set brightness level required using momentary-action switch • Press the Preset/Dia switch for at least 5 seconds or DSI transformer. max. max. max. 25* D1 D2 APD Momentary-action switch control L module with input for preset light level N D1 T T D2 DSI-TD Preset/Dia or L' N N L DALI-TD L L’ N PE T Alternative: Connect terminals “T ” and “T ” together with a jumper if a single momentary-action switch is used. NYM 2 x 1. 25 DALI phase dimmer.

based exactly on the daylight available – Accurate window-light sensor rather than error-prone roomlight sensor – Energy savings of up to 75 % – Brightness level can be changed at any time using momentary-action dimmer switches – Economically priced – short pay-back period – Long lamp service life – Option to connect presence detector The Lighting Handbook 6 / Chapter 5 .Daylight-based control with DIMLITE and DALI/DSI-TLC Applications – Single and team offices – Areas near windows in shopping centres – Classrooms – Industrial bays – Gym halls – Warehouses 0% 50 % 500 lx artificial light daylight Arguments for your customers – Dims the lighting from 100–1 %.

ED-EYE/LSD sensor positioning ° ° ° Installed in luminaire 2 groups 4 groups DALI-TLC/DSI-TLC – Switch cabinet DIMLITE 2ch DIMLITE 4ch The Lighting Handbook Chapter 5 / 7 .

− PIR input to connect a conventional movement sensor. to be individually combined: − daylight-based control − lighting scene module − presence detectors/movement sensors − group module − infrared remote control unit − Circle comfort control unit − AUTO setup: automatic initialisation. 8 / Chapter 5 The Lighting Handbook .DIMLITE Multifunctional lighting control Arguments for your customers – Compact lighting control unit for 2/4 luminaire groups – DALI and DSI outputs – automatic identification – Reducing stand-by loss: automatic power disconnection of lighting actuators via integrated relay – Up to 3 lighting scenes.5 mm². 2. 3. no addressing required Design notes − DIMLITE 2ch two-channel unit and DIMLITE 4ch four-channel unit are identical except for the number of output channels and corresponding key inputs. each control unit will always call up the same scene 1. 3. OFF) or group module (dimming of Group 1. − The DIMLITE outputs are DSI or DALI broadcast – no addressing is required during commissioning. 3 or OFF. Maximum of 8 ED units at Control IN (exception: max. in case of higher loads or capacitive/inductive loads. Groups are assigned by wiring the lighting actuators accordingly. DSI and DALI): max. depending on the control unit used. − Only Zumtobel ED units may be connected to Control-IN. − Relay for mains cut-off: 16 A resistive load. 1 light sensor). 300 m each at 1. 2. − Maximum cable length for all control lines (Control-IN. one of them with daylight-based control (depending on additional devices) – Modular range of functions. 4). − The functions of the “ED-SDED2” ED unit may be selected using the integrated rotary switch: either scene module (1. 2. an external power contactor is recommended. − Maximum of 25 DALI units (25 DALI loads) or 50 DSI units per output channel. − Up to 3 lighting scenes. − Conventional 230 V momentary-action switches can be connected to the momentary-action switch inputs.

5 mm² max. daylight-based control All groups Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 . 300 m at 1.g.g. 8 ED units L N DA DA DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) PCA optional mains isolation facility Relay L N DA DA DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) PCA max. contr. 25 DALI or 50 DSI per channel T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps Control IN Channels 3 + 4 only with DIMLITE 4 ch L N DA DA Presence detector L N DA DA EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads) e.: incandescent lamps Chapter 5 / 9 Lighting scene/ autom. unit T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps Load contactor (optional) Multifunctional lighting control max. 300 m at 1.: incandescent lamps DA K DA K’ TE one4all (1 DALI load) e.The Lighting Handbook DIMLITE L 230 V AC N PE ED-Eye ED-Sens IRlight sensor (PD+IR) TOUCH Multi-sensor DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) PCA User control units Control units Lamp control gear Lamps ED-IR infrared receiver L N DA DA DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) PCA ED-SDED2 ED-SDED2 Circle Cxx group lighting control point module scene module comf.5 mm² max.

max.5 mm2. max.g. II 12 L 11 N D1 10 PCA D2 9 Group I Conventional double momentary-action light switch G I G II L T1 T3 PD Daylight-based control unit installed in luminaire/recessed into ceiling N Se2Se1 T2 D2 D1 T4 D2 D1 DSI-TLC in DALI-TLC On/Off Dimming Motion sensor/ Presence detector or DSI electronic ballast.g. II DALI electronic ballast.5 mm 2 max. II L N PE T PD Se D phase neutral protective earth momentary-action switch input presence detector input light sensor input control line earth AC voltage Control line e. 25/group I. II TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL DALI electronic ballast. max. 25 /group I.User control units Control units Lamp control gear Lamps Daylight-based control for small rooms LUXMATE BASIC Daylight DSI-TLC or DALI-TLC 10 / Chapter 5 Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL 12 11 10 9 Group II PCA L 230/240 V 50/60 Hz N PE LSD light sensor Light-sensor line e. max. NYM 2 x 1. length 100 m Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 DSI electronic ballast. NYM 2 x 1. max. 25/group I. 25/group I. length 100 m L N D1 D2 The Lighting Handbook .

116 m max. 174 m max.50 mm² max. length of DALI line Ø 2 x 0.75 mm² 2 x 1. 50/60 Hz N PE L N DALI bus power supply DA DA LUXMATE BASIC Circle Kit DA DA DA DA DALI-CSS DALI-CSW DALI-based lighting control system for individual rooms L N PE DA phase neutral protective earth DALI control line earth AC voltage optionally several control points supply via DALI control line (3 DALI loads) L DALI electronic ballast N PE PCA DA DA L DALI phase dimmer N PE DA APD DA L DALI transformer N PE DA TE DA * max. of 64 DALI-controllable luminaires Luminaires addressed via control unit – Several control units can be used in parallel – Easy installation – Personal lighting scenes can be stored .The Lighting Handbook Lamp control gear max.50 mm² > User control units Lamps L Mains 230/240 VAC. 300 m 2 x 0. 64 DALI-compatible lamp control gear Arguments for your customers Chapter 5 / 11 – – – – Three lighting scenes can be called up using intuitive control unit Two luminaire groups can be individually dimmed Control of a max. 232 m max.00 mm² 2 x 1.

the plug&play function may not work. private dwellings or ordinary shops. a varying number of electronic ballasts may be used for an automatic circuit-breaker! What happens at the output side during a short circuit? The dimming module has been fitted with overload protection for lighting loads. It is also possible to network several Controllers. The relay contact and the Controller have no overload protection. private dwellings and shops Plug&Play – pre-addressed and preprogrammed – plug-in connectors – local stand-alone or networked system – web tool for fine-adjustment. conventional momentaryaction switches can be integrated. no licence required FAQs What is the minimum load to be applied to the universal dimmer? 20 W How many luminaires may be connected to a ZBOX Controller? Max. Can the ZBOX also be used for other applications? For other applications such as nursing homes. How can the ZBOX be upgraded? All LUXMATE bus units can be connected to the ZBOX Controller. The Lighting Handbook 12 / Chapter 5 . – direct connection via TCP-IP – transparency of costs – can be upgraded – 4 control points included – DALI Broadcast (no addressing of loads. of 300 W/channel or 10 DALI loads. Depending on the outputs of the luminaires used.ZBOX plug&play system for hotel rooms. total maximum output power per ZBOX: 16 A. It makes sense to let an engineer do the commissioning. the function and control concept can be adjusted via the ZBOX. WEBTOOL. extremely high inductive or capacitive loads may destroy the dimmer. except for RGB/W) Does one always have to use a CIRCLE control unit? Via the SDED2 input module. In this case. the electrician must ensure proper selectivity of the installation.

4 channels No phase dimmer Ceiling Group 3 Entrance area Ceiling Group 5 Wall/table Group 4 optionally Group 6 Chapter 5 / 13 * Every luminaire optionally connected to phase dimmer.The Lighting Handbook Left bed/reading Group 2 Group 1 Right bed/reading Window Bathroom Mirror Ceiling Wellness** Group 9 Blinds/ curtain ZBOX wiring scheme Group 8 Group 7 ** Luminaire pre-addressed. DALI and/or relay .

corrected) T16/T26/TC with electr.f. PAR. 50/60 Hz EMOTION Touch/EMOTION Touch C L N MomentaryDouble Presence momentary.f.5 s max.50 0.25 m COM T 1 T 2 T 3 T 4 DA DA EMOTION-SDED2 (2 DALI loads) DA DA DA DA Line 1: DALI control line e. HS. HM Safe installed load EMOTION-1RUK 500 W 250 W 250 W 30A for 0. NYM 2 x 1. NYM 2 x 1. actuators.g.5 s max.50 mm 2 mm 2 IR-TOUCH Cable length 116 174 232 300 m m m m Switching lamps using LUXMATE EMOTION Lamp type A. length 300 m max. 64 users (addresses) 99 DALI loads.000 W 4 x 920 W 4 x 800 W 4 x 10A 4 x 10A 4 x 800 W 14 / Chapter 5 .5 mm 2 max. corrected) TC with low-loss ballast (parallel p. length 300 m max. ballast LV with transformer HIT.g. 0. SDW-T. actuators. QT T16/T26 with low-loss ballast (parallel p. inputs Line 2: DALI control line e. – EMOTION-4RUKS 4 x 2.00 mm 2 1.75 mm 2 1.LUXMATE EMOTION Lighting control system Operation/supply L N PE Mains 230/240 V AC.action or action switch standard switch detector COM T 1 T 2 COM T 3 DA DA DA DA DALI 1 DALI 2 EKXP installation box (please order separately) COM T 4 DA DA EMOTION-BVS2* EMOTION-EYE (2 DALI loads) DA DA EMOTION-BV2* max. 30A for 0. inputs EMOTION-SENS (4 DALI loads) Cable lengths of DALI control line Conductor cross-sections DALI control line 2 2 2 2 x x x x 0. 64 users (addresses) 99 DALI loads.5 mm 2 max.

g.Lighting/emergency lighting L N DA DA DALI electronic ballast one4all (1 DALI load) K1 K 1' K2 K 2' K3 K 3' K4 K 4' K K' EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads) EMOTION-CSX (3 DALI loads) L N DA DA L' N EMOTION-APD (1 DALI load) max. 2 m TE one4all (1 DALI load) R G B DALI-LED converter (1 DALI load) LV halogen incandescent lamps Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps e.g. incandescent lamps 12 11 10 9 Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL L N DA DA EMOTION-4RUKS (1 DALI load) DA DA DA DA L N DA DA L N DA DA LED luminaires L N DA DA EMOTION-ANAS (1 DALI load) L N DA DA L' N 0/1–10 V units e. STARFLEX fibre optics (1 DALI load) DALI-2DSI (1 DALI load) D1 D2 D1 D2 25 DSI luminaires 25 DSI luminaires L N DA DA Locally supplied emergency luminaire LOCAL CHECK NT1 NT3 LDE DO (2 DALI loads) L N DA DA Escape-sign luminaire LOCAL CHECK (1 DALI load) Chapter 5 / 15 .

000 output addresses – no server required – LITENET flexis N3 in 19" rack – fail-safe thanks to RAID1 – optional LITENET incontrol operating software – optional BACnet and OPC interfaces PC with LITENET insite management software LITENET flexis N1 LITENET flexis N1 LITENET flexis N1 Ethernet ( TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink Daylight sensor 3 x 64 DALI Luminaires Blinds Control points Standard L ITENET server 16 / Chapter 5 The Lighting Handbook LITENET flexible – LITENET server extremely – up to 10.000 output addresses fail-safe thanks to RAID1 – optional LITENET incontrol (or more upon request) operating software – can be cascaded as required – LITENET flexis N1 installed in – optional BACnet and OPC switch cabinet interfaces .LUXMATE LITENET for any size of building LITENET flexis N2 with server functions PC with LITENET insite management software Ethernet (TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink Daylight sensor 3 x 64 DALI Luminaires Bus Blinds Control points LITENET economy – up to 500 output addresses – no server required LITENET flexis N3 with server functions – LITENET flexisN2 without rotating parts (wear-free) – optional LITENET incontrol operating software PC with LITENET insite management software Ethernet (TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink Daylight sensor 3 x 64 DALI Luminaires Bus Blinds Control points LITENET compact – up to 2.

DALI – a must for modern office buildings Benefits of DALI installation: – Individual addressing: As each luminaire can be addressed individually. – Status feedback from each individual luminaire: Detailed knowledge about the installation’s state enable the operator to optimise operation and maintenance. as a switched phase is not required for each luminaire. Operation Purchase Implementation Project stages Project planning Planning Design Costs of modification Modification costs with conventional luminaires Modification costs with DOD luminaires The Lighting Handbook The models of this switchable luminaire originally supplied already boast all the above-mentioned benefits. ZUMTOBEL is now offering a real innovation providing cost benefits at all stages of a project – from design through to actual operation of a building. the highest flexibility requirements can be met and installation faults can be avoided. Chapter 5 / 17 . without any additional installation effort. Moreover. printer. the dimming function can be purchased at any time via a software upgrade. Luminaires are grouped and assigned to control units subsequently. With a switchable DALI luminaire model. users could only choose between switchable luminaires with electronic ballast or more expensive luminaires based on DALI. current alarms can be displayed by screen. And if dimming should be required at a later point in time – for instance for convenient control of scenes or economically efficient daylight-based control. via the easy to use LITENET-insite software. ZUMTOBEL “Dimming on Demand” (DOD) makes DALI available at a special price Previously. e-mail or text message. – Zero-power switching: Both installation effort and space required in the switch cabinet are reduced.

N 230 VAC B1. N L. B 2 . N 24VDC 24VAC B 1 . B2.LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (selection) Commissioning/user control units LM-CG/ LM-PFC LM-EG Installation-specific Single-room LM-MPO operation solution LM-CPA/CPO LM-XPO Single-/ Multi-room solution IRED LM-IRB LM-CS(X) control point IRS B1. N B1. N B 1 . N L. L. N Motor 2 Timer control B1. L. B2 LM-2FSE L. N 18 / Chapter 5 . B2 L. B2 L. N B1. B2 K1 LM-2LSE Blinds Motor 1 B1.or DALI control line Sensor cable For dimming and switching individual luminaire groups EnOcean Function switch without battery Room management/central control/automation Screen B1. N Sequence automation Motor 1 Window Window LM-BVS35 B1. B2 Blinds Motor 2 LM-2JSM LM-RV Partition switch L. B 2 . L. N RS-232 link to AV system ASCI plain text protocol B1. B2 LM-SDED LM-SWED LM-RFR LUXMATE Bus Mains DSI. B2 LM-iZSQ L. B2 B1. B2 LM-ZSM L. B2 LM-SI03 L. N B1.

D2 D1. K L. N B1. N B1. N D1. D2 L. DA PCA LM-DALI L. DA TE DA. B2 L. N Daylight-based dimming (DSI or DALI) DA. DA LED converter LED luminaires LV halogen incandescent lamps DA. D2 D1. B2 K'. N Fluorescent lamps DSI dimming up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts LM-2TL LM 2TL DALI L. B2 up to 64 ballasts in 16 groups DA. D2 L. emergency lighting LM-DALIS SB 64 Local check repeater SB 128 local check CTP locally supplied LOCAL CHECK emergency luminaire LOCAL CHECK escape-sign luminaire ONLITE interface for emergency lighting/local supply Chapter 5 / 19 . N B1. D2 Fluorescent lamps LSD option to connect a daylight sensor to the LM-STL or LM-2TL/DALI up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts D1.Lighting management LM-2RUK L. DA DA. N B1. D2 D1. DA APD Fluorescent lamps Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps DALI dimming ONLITE interface. N Electronic/conventional ballast for discharge lamps HIT/HST/HME lamps Switching LM-DSI L. B2 up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts D1.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV – Louvre (surf. . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL FAC-ID T16 1-lamp . . . . . MIREL FEC2 T16 M625. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MC-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS L and H 200/250 . . . . . . . MIRAL FAC T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 6 Quickplan – calculating the n° of lum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA D RKF/RKID 32/42/57/85 W . . . . . COPA I 400 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-mounted/rec) . . . ./rec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN Advanced A-C/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II P-D T16. . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS recessed T16 M625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free-standing uplights . . . . . . . . TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS A-ID . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON D-PL (Pool-Light). . . CLARIS II MD-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS T16 (surf. . . . . . . . . . TECTON D-ID and I . . . LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OREA GZ-ID T16. . . . required Efficiency method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA D 250 W QT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MD-D T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON D-ML-B and ML-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (surf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-ASY HIT/HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA I 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B. . . . A-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS HF/HG PSP+ 175/200/250 (partly PSP+). . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS Q Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTX II C or D. . . . . . . VAERO-S ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-mounted) . . . . . . . . . . . A-ASY HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II P-ID T16 . COPA A-B HIT/HST 400 W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERLUCE D/O. . . . COPA A-B HIT/HST 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-N HME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN Classic C-O/R . . . . . . . . RAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-mounted/recessed) . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTX II C-ID T16. . . . . . . .) SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 EVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 T16-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCUBA T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS Q High . . . MIREL FEC2 T16 M600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON-IP louvre T16 . . . COPA D HIT 70/150 W . . . . . . PANOS S HIT-CE 150/200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS LG/LG PSP+ M LG TC-TEL 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV – Grid-mesh controller (surf. . . . . . CLEAN Supreme S-C/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-moun. . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed) . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL FAC-ID T16 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2LIGHT E1-Mini/TC-TELI/HIT and E3 TC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS LF/LG TC-DEL 175/200/250 . . . . . . . . . . .

.

Em = n · z · ØL · MF · dB A n= Em · A z · ØL · MF · dB n = number of luminaires MF = maintenance factor A = floor area Em = mean illuminance z = number of lamps per luminaire ØL = luminous flux of the lamp* dB = utilization factor (= dLB · dR ) dLB = luminaire efficiency dR = room utilization factor – Standard UGR values and maintained luminance levels for luminance limit angle (e. of luminaires x factor) – Maintenance factor uses an assumed value (graphs calculated using MF = 0. it is therefore required to use the rated luminous flux levels of lamps at 25 °C in the calculation programmes and/or when applying the efficiency method. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 6 / 3 . Today. the illuminance level required is usually not achieved. by accessing luminaire databases. these values are usually calculated on a computer-aided basis. 65° or 75°) all around the luminaire – Correction factors for dark rooms and different ceiling heights (no. For designing.8) – Uniformity: max. luminaire spacing to achieve a uniformity greater than or equal to 0.7 Please note: with maximum spacing between luminaires.Efficiency method The Quickplan graphs have been calculated using the efficiency method. The following formulae can be used to give an approximate figure for the mean illuminance and the number of luminaires required.g. * Luminaire efficiency generally relates to laboratory measurements at an ambient temperature of 25 °C.

500 lx 300 lx PANOS HF/HG PSP+175/200/250 (partly PSP+) 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) 2/13 W PSP+ (175) 4 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 m (2/13 PSP+. 2.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.9 m (2/13.3 2/26 W (200) 2/26 W PSP+ (200) 2/26 W TC-DEL (250) 2/26 W PSP+ (250) X=4H Y=8H / S=0.8 m (2/26 200). 65° / *75 ° < 19 < 19 *200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 < 22 < 19 1000 cd/m2 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 1000 cd/m2 200 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1. 2/26) The Lighting Handbook .1 1.2 1.78 2000 h 1 year 3 years 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 2.6 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS HF/HG 2/13 W PSP+ (175) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W (200) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W PSP+ (200) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W PSP+ (250) PANOS HF/HG 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W TC-DEL (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv. 2/26 PSP+ 250) 3.2 1.

78 2000 h 1 year 3 years 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 2/26 W (250) 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Uniformity 200 Axial spacing up to 3.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.4 1. up to 4.6 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS LF/LG 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) PANOS LF/LG 2/18 W TC-DEL (200) PANOS LF/LG 2/26 W TC-DEL (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.3 PANOS LF/LG TC-DEL 175/200/250 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 75° < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 2/13 W (175) 2/18 W (200) Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.1 1. 2/26 W).7 m (2/18 W).2 1.2 1.4 m (2/32 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Chapter 6 / 5 Floor area m2 . up to 4 m (2/13 W.

25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 PANOS LG 2/32 W TC-TEL (250) PANOS LG 2/32 W PSP+ TC-TEL (250) PANOS M LG 2/32 W TC-TEL (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1.78 2000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 4.4 1. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 28 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.3 60 6 / Chapter 6 18 12 6 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.7 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 LG 2/32 W LG 2/32 W PSP+ M LG 2/32 W PANOS LG/LG PSP+ M LG TC-TEL 250 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.

1 1.3 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. and 1/70 W 250 up to 4 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Chapter 6 / 7 Floor area m2 .6 over 50 m² 1.7 m. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 28 < 28 20 15 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-CE (200) FL G12 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-DE (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 1/70 W (150) FL 1/70 W (200) FL 1/70 W (250) PANOS S HIT-CE 150/200/250 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 12 9 6 3 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-CE (150) FL G8.

6 over 50 m² 1.3 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.500 lx 300 lx 60 50 40 30 20 10 PANOS L and H 200/250 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.9 m for HG 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 8 / Chapter 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.9 m for LG.1 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 PANOS LG 2/18 W (200) PANOS LG PSP+1/32 W (200) PANOS HG 2/26 W (250) PANOS HG 1/42 W PSP+ (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.78 2000 h 1 year 3 years Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 3.4 1. 65° / *75° *< 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 *< 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 40 LG 2/18 W (200) LG 1/32 W PSP+ (200) 30 HG 2/26 W (250) HG 1/42 W PSP+ (250) Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0. and 2.

< 28 < 25 < 28 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 28 < 25 LL 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) 40 LM 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) 30 LF + LG 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 1.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.6 PANOS Q Low Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.8 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 9 Floor area m2 . axial spacing up to 5.1 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 PANOS Q LF 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LG 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LM 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LL 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 60 50 40 30 20 10 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.

2 1.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.4 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 PANOS Q HG 2/18 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HG 2/26 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HG 2/32 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HF 2/42 W TC-TELI (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.6 over 50 m² 1.4 1.1 1.3 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. axial spacing up to 3.2 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 PANOS Q High Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. < 19 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 40 HG 2/18 W TC-TELI (250) HG 2/26 W TC-TELI (250) 30 HG 2/32 W TC-TELI (250) Maintenance factor (MF) 20 HF 2/42 W TC-TELI (250) 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 10 / Chapter 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.

6 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 11 Floor area m2 .4 1.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.2 1.1 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 55° 65° <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 <13 <13 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/80 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 2/28 W VAERO-S ID Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. axial spacing up to 5.6 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 18 2/35 W 2/54 W 2/49 W VAERO-S ID 2/28 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/35 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/49 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/54 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/80 W SR ASI1000 UGR_axial UGR_transv.

2 1.4 1.2 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 12 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.6 over 50 m² 1. <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 20 15 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.6 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.75 4000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5.500 lx 300 lx 18 2/49 W OREA GZ-ID T16 15 12 2/54 W 2/80 W 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1.3 9 6 3 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 OREA GZ-ID 2/54 W T16 OREA GZ-ID 2/49 W T16 OREA GZ-ID 2/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.

4 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 4/14 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 13 Floor area m2 .2 1. axial spacing up to 3. 2/35 W).77 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 180 200 3.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 4/14 W LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.7 m (2/28 W.1 1.2 1.4 m (2/24 W. 50 L-FIELDS A 2/28 W L-FIELDS A 2/35 W L-FIELDS A 4/14 W < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 65° < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 40 18 12 6 30 2/28 W 2/35 W Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.6 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.

3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.77 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 180 200 3.2 1.2 1.4 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 2/24 W LIGHT FIELDS recessed T16 M625 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.6 over 50 m² 1.7 m (2/28 W.4 m (4/14 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 14 / Chapter 6 24 18 12 6 4/14 W 2/28 W 2/35 W Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. axial spacing up to 3. 2/35 W).1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 65° 50 L-FIELD 2/24 W T16 L-FIELD 2/28 W T16 L-FIELD 2/35 W T16 L-FIELD 4/14 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 1.

3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. axial spacing up to 3.4 1.2 1.7 m (2/49 W.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 4/24 W 2/54 W LIGHT FIELDS A-ID Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1.1 m (4/24 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 15 Floor area m2 .1 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 L-FIELDS A-ID 2/49 W L-FIELDS A-ID 2/54 W L-FIELDS A-ID 4/24 W UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 40 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/49 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0. 2/54 W).75 4000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 180 200 3.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.6 over 50 m² 1.

1 1.4 m (1/55 W) or 4.2 1.2 1. < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 EM 1/55 W TC-L 625 30 12 6 EM 1/55 W TC-L 600 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 EM 2/49 W T16 10 Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 16 / Chapter 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.3 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 ML4 B EM 1/55 W TC–L M600 ML4 B EM 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML4 A EM 2/35 W T16 M625 ML4 A EM 2/49 W T16 M600 ML4 A EM 2/49 W T16 M625 UGR_axial UGR_transv. axial spacing up to 5.4 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 160 180 200 Max.6 over 50 m² 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 EM 2/35 W T16 MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.7 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .

6 over 50 m² 1. axial spacing up to 180 200 6. 5.8 m (2/24 W + 2/24 W.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity Max.5 m (1/54 W.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (surface-mounted) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 4.2 1.9 m (2/24 W). 2/49 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 17 Floor area m2 .25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 AM 1/54 W T16 ML4 A AM 1/54 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/24 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/40 W TC-L ML4 A AM 2/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv. 2/40 W).25 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.3 30 AM 2/40 W TC-L Maintenance factor (MF) 20 AM 2/49 W T16 AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16 10 Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1. < 19 < 16 < 22 < 16 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 22 < 19 AM 2/24 W T16 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.1 1.

500 lx 300 lx 36 30 EC 2/24 W T16 MELLOW LIGHT IV – Louvre (surface-mounted/recessed) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.7 m (2/24 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .6 40 18 EC 2/54 W T16 ML IV A AC 2/35 W T16 ML IV A AC 2/49 W T16 ML IV A AC 2/54 W T16 ML IV B EC 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML IV B EC 2/24 W T16 M625 ML IV A EC 2/54 W T16 M625 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 65° < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 18 / Chapter 6 24 EC 1/55 W TC-L Ceiling height: 3 m 50 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.8 6000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4 m.4 1.2 1. axial spacing up to 4.3 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) AC 2/35 W T16 20 AC 2/49 W T16 AC 2/54 W T16 10 Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.1 1.

1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 (surface-mounted/recessed) X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.4 m/4.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 MELLOW LIGHT IV – Grid-mesh controller Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1. axial spacing up to 5.1 1.7 m (2/54 W EB) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 19 Floor area m2 .6 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 EB 2/24 W T16 40 ML IV A AB 2/35 W T16 ML IV A AB 2/49 W T16 ML IV A AB 2/54 W T16 ML IV B EB 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML IV B EB 2/24 W T16 M625 ML IV B EB 2/54 W T16 M625 UGR_axial UGR_transv.3 30 EB 2/54 W T16 AB 2/49 W T16 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.8 6000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing. < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 EB 1/55 W TC-L AB 2/35 W T16 AB 2/54 W T16 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 1.

25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 20 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.8 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .6 over 50 m² 1.4 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 1/35 W SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 Electronic ballast 30 24 1/54 W 2/28 W 2/35 W 2/54 W 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1. 65° <13 <13 < 500 cd/m 2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <16 < 1000 cd/m2 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.3 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 1/35 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 1/54 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/28 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/35 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.77 4000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.2 1.

65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.8 m (4/14 W) or 4.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 24 18 12 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 1/35 W.1 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1. 2/28 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 21 Floor area m2 . 1/54 W.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity Continuous row spacing up 180 200 to 4.4 1.6 40 1/54 W 4/14 W 2/28 W MIREL FEC2 1/28 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 1/35 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 1/54 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 2/28 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 B 4/14 W T16 M600 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.1 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 1/28 W MIREL FEC2 T16 M600 30 1/35 W 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.3 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 m (1/28 W.

4 m (1/28 W. 1/35 W. 2/28 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .2 1.1 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 1/28 W MIREL FEC2 T16 M625 30 1/35 W 1/54 W 4/14 W 2/28 W 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.8 m (4/14 W) or 4.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 22 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1. 1/54 W. 65 ° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.6 over 50 m² 1.3 24 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 MIREL FEC2 1/28 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 1/35 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 1/54 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 2/28 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 B 4/14 W T16 M625 UGR_axial UGR_transv.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity Continuous row spacing up 180 200 to 4.4 1.

The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 1/80 W MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS T16 30 (surface-mounted/recessed) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.9 m 180 200 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 23 Floor area m 2 .3 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year 10 3 5 Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 3.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 12 9 2/80 W MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 1/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 2/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 3/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 4/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1. < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 20 15 6 3/80 W 4/80 W Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1.6 over 50 m² 1.

3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 65 ° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m2 40 18 12 6 30 2/54 W Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 24 / Chapter 6 24 1/49 W Ceiling height: 3 m 50 MIRAL FAC 1/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC 1/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC 2/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/28 W MIRAL FAC T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.6 over 50 m² 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.9 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook . axial spacing up to 4.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.5 m (1/49 W) or 3.2 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.

2 1.2 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.1 1.3 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0. axial spacing up to 3.5 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 25 Floor area m2 . 65 ° < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.6 over 50 m² 1.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 1/35 W 1/49 W 1/54 W MIRAL FAC-ID 1/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/35 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 1/28 W MIRAL FAC-ID T16 1-lamp 30 24 18 12 6 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.

axial spacing up to 3.1 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.5 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .6 MIRAL FAC-ID T16 2-lamp Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 65 ° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.4 1.2 1.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 26 / Chapter 6 2/28 W 2/35 W 2/49 W 2/54 W Ceiling height: 3 m 50 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/35 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.

3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 24 18 12 6 CLARIS II MD-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 2/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 2/54 W T16 40 1/54 W UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1.4 1.6 over 50 m² 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/35 W CLARIS II MD-ID T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1.0 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 27 Floor area m2 .25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4. 65° < 500 cd/m 2 < 13 < 13 < 500 cd/m 2 < 16 < 13 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 30 2/35 W 2/54 W Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.

65° < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.3 CLARIS II MD-D T16 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.1 1.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 1/49 W 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 4.500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .6 over 50 m² 1.4 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 28 / Chapter 6 1/28 W Ceiling height: 3 m CLARIS II MD-D 1/28 W T16 CLARIS II MD-D 1/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.

65° < 1500 cd/m2 < 13 < 13 < 16 < 16 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 1.4 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 29 Floor area m2 .25 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.3 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 24 1/54 W CLARIS II MC-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 2/35 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 2/54 W T16 40 18 2/35 W 2/54 W UGR_axial UGR_transv.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5.2 1.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/35 W CLARIS II MC-ID T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 1.

3 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .6 over 50 m² 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 1/54 W 1/49 W CLARIS II P-ID T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.3 60 30 / Chapter 6 1/35 W X=4H Y=8H / S=0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5.2 1.1 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 CLARIS II P-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II P-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II P-ID 1/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 19 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 40 18 12 6 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.

65° < 22 < 22 1000 cd/m2 < 25 < 25 1000 cd/m2 1/28 W Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 1.3 CLARIS II P-D T16 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 1/49 W 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Uniformity 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5.2 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Chapter 6 / 31 Floor area m2 .25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m CLARIS II P-D 1/28 W T16 CLARIS II P-D 1/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.4 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1.

4 1.500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 55° / *65° / **75° *200 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 19 < 19 *1000 cd/m 2 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 19 < 19 **1000 cd/m 2 **1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 22 Maintenance factor (MF) 1/80 W 2/55 W 1/70 W 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (1/75 1000 h) Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0. up to 3.1 1.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 3.9 m (1/80 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .3 2LIGHT E1-Mini/TC-TELI/HIT and E3 TC-L X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.4 m (1/42 W).25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 32 / Chapter 6 1/75 W FL-S 1/20 W S 1/42 W Ceiling height: 3 m 2LIGHT 1/75 W FL-S 2LIGHT 1/20 W S 2LIGHT 1/42 W E1 TC-TELI 2LIGHT 1/70 W E1 HIT G8.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1.5 2LIGHT 1/80 W E3 TC-L 2LIGHT 2/55 W E3 TC-L UGR_axial UGR_transv.

1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/35 W RTX II C or D Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. up to 4 m 2-lamp 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 33 Floor area m2 .3 m 1-lamp.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1.4 1.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1. 50 24 18 12 6 40 1/49 W 1/54 W 2/35 W 2/54 W RTX2 1/35 W + D RTX2 1/49 W + D RTX2 1/54 W + D RTX2 2/35 W + D RTX2 2/54 W + D < 16 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22 65° < 200 cd/m2 < 200 cd/m2 < 200 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.

65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1. up to 3.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.5 m 1-lamp.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 34 / Chapter 6 24 18 12 6 1/49 W 2/35 W 2/54 W Ceiling height: 3 m 50 RTX2 C-ID 1/35 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 1/49 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 2/35 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 2/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.1 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/35 W RTX II C-ID T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1.9 m 2-lamp 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .

3 1.7 2.4 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 20 LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/55 W TC-L LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/80 W TC-L KAREA-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L LANOS-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L 65 ° UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 35 Floor area m2 .2 Free-standing uplights Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. axial spacing up to 7.3 1.5 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.5 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 <13 <13 15 L-FIELDS 3/55 W Maintenance factor (MF) KAREA 4/55 W 10 LANOS 4/55 W L-FIELDS 3/80 W 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 12 9 6 3 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.72 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.

6 m/4.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. < 28 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 25 40 1/54 W+PK 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/54 W -I 2/54 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.8 m (-I 2/54 W+R) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 36 / Chapter 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.80 6000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 5.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 1/54 W TECTON(-I) + RW T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.3 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 TECTON 1/54 W T16 + RW TECTON 1/54 W T16+PK+RW TECTON 2/54 W T16 + RW TECTON-I 2/54 W T16 + R UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 1.

3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.2 1.4 1.6 m/4.80 6000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 5.8 m (-I 2/80 W+R) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 37 Floor area m2 .1 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 1/80 W+PK 1/80 W TECTON(-I) + RW T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. < 28 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 25 40 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/80 W -I 2/80 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.6 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 TECTON 1/80 W T16 + RW TECTON 1/80 W T16+PK+RW TECTON 2/80 W T16 + RW TECTON-I 2/80 W T16 + R UGR_axial UGR_transv.

25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 38 / Chapter 6 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 TECTON-IP 1/54 W T16 TECTON-IP 1/80 W T16 TECTON-IP 2/54 W T16 TECTON-IP 2/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 1/54 W 1/80 W 2/54 W 2/80 W TECTON-IP Louvre T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 1.80 6000 h 2 years 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 4.4 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook . < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.4 1.

The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 ML-B 2/49 W TECTON D-ML-B and ML-C Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.5 m for ML-B and up to 3.1 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 TECTON D ML-B 2/54 W TECTON D ML-B 2/49 W TECTON D ML-C 2/49 W TECTON D ML-C 2/54 W UGR_axial UGR_transv.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.6 over 50 m² 1.4 1.2 1. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 40 18 ML-B 2/54 W ML-C 2/49 W 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 ML-C 2/54 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.9 m for ML-C 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 39 Floor area m2 .79 4000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.

D-I up to 7 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .4 1.25 (1.500 lx 300 lx 18 15 height 2/54 W + I 2/54 W + ID 2/80 W + I 2/80 W + ID TECTON D-ID and -I Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m 2 20 15 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Wartung (D-I 1/2 year) Room maintenance MF= 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing D-ID up to 4.5 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 TECTON D-ID 2/54 W T16 TECTON D-ID 2/80 W T16 TECTON D-I 2/54 W T16 TECTON D-I 2/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.4 1.5 for D-I) • Ceiling Floor area 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 40 / Chapter 6 12 9 6 3 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² ID I 1.7 1.2 m.2 over 50 m² ID I 1.2 1.6 2.1 1.

2 1.1 1.4 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 6 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 41 Floor area m 2 .3 15 6 3 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 12 9 2/80 W TECTON D-PL 2/35 W T16 TECTON D-PL 2/49 W T16 TECTON D-PL 2/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 20 2/49 W height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 2/35 W TECTON D-PL (Pool-Light) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.

83 (HSE) 8000 h 3 years 3 years Ceiling height: 6 m 25 1/250 W HIE RAB 19000 lm TST 1/250 W HSE RAB 25000 lm TST UGR_axial UGR_transv.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 42 / Chapter 6 12 9 6 3 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) Room maintenance MF=0.79 (HIE) 4000 h 1 year 1 year MF=0.500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA I 250 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 65° < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/ m2 < 16 < 19 < 1000 cd/ m2 20 1/250 W HIE 15 1/250 W HSE 10 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 5 m (TST) 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.

70 (HIE) 2000 h 1 year 1 year MF=0. (IP65) Room maintenance MF=0.3 m * (Colour rendition Ra > 60) ** (Colour rendition Ra > 20) 1/400 W 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Chapter 6 / 43 Floor area m 2 .25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 6 m 25 12 9 6 3 1/400 W HIE RAB 36000 lm 1/400 W HSE RAB 36000 lm* 1/400 W HSE RAB 47000 lm** UGR_axial UGR_transv.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA I 400 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 65°/75° < 19 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 16 65°< 1000 cd/m2 20 15 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin.83 (HSE) 8000 h 3 years 3 years 1/400 W HIE 10 HSE** 1/400 W HSE* Uniformity Axial spacing up to 8.1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.

up to 5.2 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 65° / 75° < 16 65°< 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 19 75°< 200 cd/m2 < 19 < 25 < 25 < 22 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 22 < 19 65°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 19 65°< 1000 cd/m2 1/42 W 30 1/57 W 1/85 W 20 10 Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 5 m.1 1.4 COPA D RKF/RKID 32/42/57/85 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. RKID) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 height 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.7 m (42 W RKID. up to 5.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 44 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room MF= 0. 57 W RKF.4 m (42 W RKF).78 Lamp operation 2000 h Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years Ceiling height: 4 m 50 1/32 W 40 COPA D 1/32 W RKF/RKID COPA D 1/42 W RKF/RKID COPA D 1/57 W RKF COPA D 1/57 W RKID COPA D 1/85 W RKF COPA D 1/85 W RKID UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.2 1.

2 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 65° / *75° < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 22 < 22 *< 1000 cd/m2 20 15 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.4 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 4 m 25 12 9 6 3 COPA D 1/70 W HIT (6400 lm) COPA D 1/150 W HIT (14000 lm) UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.77 (HCI) Lamp operation 2000 h Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years 10 1/150 W 5 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 4 m 180 200 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 45 Floor area m2 .The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 1/70 W COPA D HIT 70/150 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1.

25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 46 / Chapter 6 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 4 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 over 50 m² 1.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.76 1000 h 1 year 2 years 20 10 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 4.1 1. 50 COPA D 1/250 W QT < 19 < 19 65° <1000 cd/m2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 1/250 W COPA D 250 W QT Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.5 m 180 200 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .2 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.

1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.3 m 2/250 W HIT.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA A-B HIT/HST 250 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. (IP65) Room maintenance MF=0. up to 8. up to 9 m 1/250 W HIT 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Chapter 6 / 47 Floor area m 2 .5 m HST.80 (HIT) 2000 h 1 year 2 years MF=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 6 m 25 1/250 W HIT 1/250 W HST COPA A-B 1/250 W HIT (20000 lm) COPA A-B 1/250 W HST (23000 lm) COPA A-B 2/250 W HIT (40000 lm) COPA A-B 2/250 W HST (46000 lm) UGR_axial UGR_transv.81 (HST) 14000 h 1 year 2 years 10 Uniformity Axial spacing up to: 7. < 28 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 28 < 28 < 25 20 9 6 3 12 15 2/250 W HST 2/250 W HIT Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin.

81 (HST) 14000 h 1 year 2 years 10 3 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 9 m * (Colour rendition Ra > 90) ** (Colour rendition Ra > 20) 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.67 (HIT) 1000 h 1 year 2 years MF=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 48 / Chapter 6 12 1/400 W HIT Ceiling height: 6 m 25 COPA A_B 1/400 W HIT (32000 lm) * COPA A_B 1/400 W HST (48000 lm) ** UGR_axial UGR_transv. (IP65) Room maintenance MF=0. < 28 < 28 < 28 < 28 20 9 6 1/400 W HST 15 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin.500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA A-B HIT/HST 400 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.

1 Maintenance factor (MF) 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 6 m 50 24 1/250 W COPA A-N 1/250 W HME (13000 lm) COPA A-N 1/400 W HME (22000 lm) UGR_axial UGR_transv.80 2000 h 1 year 2 years 20 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 9 m 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Chapter 6 / 49 Floor area m 2 .The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 COPA A-N HME Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. < 28 < 28 < 29 < 29 40 18 1/400 W 30 12 6 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.

5 m (A-B) 2 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook . up to 7.83 10000 h 2 years 2 years 4 2 1 A-B 1/600 W A-ASY 1/600 W Uniformity Axial spacing up to 6. A-ASY HST Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 50 / Chapter 6 4 3 A-T 1/600 W Ceiling height: 6 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. A-T. 8 COPA A-B 1/600 W HST COPA A-T 1/600 W HST COPA A-ASY 1/600 W HST < 25 < 28 6 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.500 lx 300 lx 6 5 COPA A-B.3 m (ASY).

81 (HST) 14000 h 2 years 2 years 10 1/400 W HST 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Chapter 6 / 51 Floor area m 2 .The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA A-ASY HIT/HST Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 6 m 25 12 1/250 W HST 1/400 W HIT COPA A-ASY 1/250 W HIT (20000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/250 W HST (27000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/400 W HIT (32000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/400 W HST (48000 lm) 20 9 6 3 1/250 W HIT 15 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.

25) Maintenance factor (MF) (D) Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin.500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.79 (D) 4000 h 2 years 2 years PERLUCE D/O X=4H Y=8H / S=0.5 m (O) 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 O 1/49 W T16 D 1/49 W T16 D 1/80 W T16 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 200 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .83 (O) 2000 h 1 year 1 year O 2/18 W TC-L Ceiling height: 3 m PERLUCE D 1/49 W T16 PERLUCE D 1/80 W T16 PERLUCE O 2/18 W TC-L PERLUCE O 1/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 (O=1. 65° < 16 < 16 <1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 19 <1000 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 19 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 3.9 m (D) and up to 6.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 52 / Chapter 6 (O) MF= 0.

The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.1 1. < 28 < 22 < 29 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 29 < 22 40 30 1/58 W T26 1/80 W T16 2/54 W T16 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/36 W T26 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.2 1.6 RAIN Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 8 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 53 Floor area m 2 .4 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 RAIN 1/58 W T 26 RAIN 1/80 W T 16 RAIN 2/36 W T 26 RAIN 2/54 W T 16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.

up to 5 m 2/40 W 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 1.500 lx 300 lx 54 48 42 36 1/55 W CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 T16-R Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area 90 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.4 1. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 60 50 1/40 W 40 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 2/40 W 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.76 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity Axial spacing up to 4.5 m.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 54 / Chapter 6 30 24 18 12 6 180 200 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.3 22+ 40 W 80 Ceiling height: 3 m 70 CHIARO FTR 1/40 W T16-R CHIARO FTR 1/55 W T16-R CHIARO FTR 1/22 W+40W T16-R CHIARO FTR 2/40 W T16-R UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.

1 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.2 1. < 22 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 22 20 1/36 W 15 1/58 W 2/36 W Maintenance factor (MF) 10 2/58 W 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.3 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.4 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 SCUBA 1/36 W T26 SCUBA 1/58 W T26 SCUBA 2/36 W T26 SCUBA 2/58 W T26 UGR_axial UGR_transv.5 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 55 Floor area m2 .6 SCUBA T26 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 8.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.

9 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .500 lx 300 lx 18 C-O 4/24 W T16 CLEAN C-O/R 15 12 C-O 3/40 W TC-L 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.3 9 C-R 3/55 W TC-L Ceiling height: 3 m 25 CLEAN C-O 4/24 W T16 CLEAN C-O 3/40 W TC-L CLEAN C-R 3/55 W TC-L UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. with 3/55 W up to 3.2 1.4 1. < 22 < 22 < 25 < 25 < 19 < 22 20 15 6 3 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (-O = 4000 h) Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.78 3000 h 2 years 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 56 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1.5 m.1 1.6 over 50 m² 1.

2 1. 65° < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 19 75° < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 75° < 1000 cd/m2 40 18 12 6 30 A-C 3/40 W TC-L A-C 2/49 W T16 A-C 3/55 W TC-L Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (TC-L 3000 h) Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0. up to 4.9 m (2/49 W A-C).6 over 50 m² 1.78 4000 h (T16) 2 years 2 years Uniformity Continuous row spacing up 180 200 to 3.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 m (TC-L) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 57 Floor area m 2 .25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 CLEAN A-C 2/49 W T16 CLEAN A-O 2/49 W T16 CLEAN A-C 3/40 W TC-L CLEAN A-C 3/55 W TC-L 65°/75° UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1. up to 4.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 A-O 2/49 W T16 CLEAN A-C/O Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.5 m (2/49 W A-O).4 1.1 1.

25 CLEAN S-C 3/49 W CLEAN S-C 3/80 W CLEAN S-R 2/49 W < 16 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 19 < 22 75° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 1000 cd/m 2 20 15 6 3 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.79 4000 h 2 years 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 3.3 30 58 / Chapter 6 9 S-C 3/49 W S-C 3/80 W X=4H Y=8H / S=0.4 1.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.9 m and up to 4.500 lx 300 lx 18 15 12 S-R 2/49 W CLEAN S-C/R Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 1.5 m (2/49 S-R) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.6 over 50 m² 1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosion-proofness . . . . . . . . . . Clean-room technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical effects on materials . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 7 Technical information Protection classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits . . 3 3–5 6–7 8–9 10 11 – 13 14 – 16 17 – 24 25 – 27 . . Low-voltage installations . Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements concerning safety – ball-proofness . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

etc. PRIO low-voltage spotlights.g. for instance moisture-proof batten luminaires and moisture-proof diffuser luminaires. Class I luminaires Class I is not identified by a symbol. e. Protection class I Protection class II Protection class III Degrees of protection Degrees of protection indicate the following properties of equipment: – The quality of its protection against direct contact – Its sealing against ingress of solid foreign bodies (dust.Protection classes ZUMTOBEL luminaires are classified into the following protection classes – a measure intended to afford protection against electric shock. stones. the luminaire is intended to be connected to a protective earth conductor which bears the mark. sand.) – Its sealing against the ingress of water The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 3 . The ZUMTOBEL range includes protection class II luminaires. Class II luminaires Class II luminaires have total insulation but no protective earth terminal. ZUMTOBEL architectural luminaires include class III luminaires. Class III luminaires Class III identifies luminaires that are intended for operation with protective extra low voltage (50 V max. Most ZUMTOBEL luminaires are designed in accordance with protection class I unless otherwise stated.).

5 mm Protection against solid bodies > 1 mm Dust-protected (limited ingress of dust) Dust-tight (no ingress of dust) Protection against moisture as per second digit IP X0 IP X1 IP X2 IP X3 IP X4 IP X5 IP X6 IP X7 IP X8 No special protection Drip-proof – protection against water drops Protection against water drops up to 15º from the vertical Rainproof – protection against spray water up to 60º Splash-proof – protection against spray water from all directions Jet-proof – protection against jets of water Protection against heavy seas (conditions on ship decks) Watertight – protection against immersion (pressure and time specified) Protection against immersion under pressure (with instructions from manufacturer) 4 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook . Protection against ingress of water falling at any angle up to 60º from vertical. There must be no adverse effect (spray water). 2 3 Degrees of protection for technical luminaires Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies as per first digit IP 0X IP 1X IP 2X IP 3X IP 4X IP 5X IP 6X Unprotected against ingress of solid foreign bodies Protection against solid bodies > 50 mm Protection against solid bodies > 12 mm Protection against solid bodies > 2. insertion of fingers or objects.The type of protection is defined by two degrees of protection in accordance with IEC 529: – Degree of shock-hazard protection and protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies (1st digit) – Degree of protection against the ingress of water (2nd digit) For example IP 23: IP INGRESS PROTECTION Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies having Ø > 12 mm (medium-sized solid bodies).

straw.Applications for luminaires with increased protection Damp locations Bakeries Manure sheds Animal-feed preparation facilities Industrial kitchens Boiler rooms Commercial workshops Granaries (Deep-freeze) cold storage Pump houses Sculleries Laundries Wet locations Beer or wine cellars Shower cubicles Meat processing facilities Electroplating facilities Greenhouses Dairies Workshops using wet processes Car wash areas Agricultural facilities IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP 20 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X4 IP X4 IP X5 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4 The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets IP X4: in rinsing areas The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets Beer or wine cellars IP 44 Shower cubicles IP 44 Stores. maximum mesh size 60 mm Badminton courts Squash courts Indoor tennis courts Gymnasia and sports halls Chapter 7 / 5 . storerooms for hay. feedstuff IP 44 Intensive stock farming IP 44 Animal sheds IP 44 Adjoining rooms of animal sheds IP 44 Facilities with increased fire risk Workrooms Woodworking Sawmills Paper processing Textile processing Treatment and fabrication Gymnasia and sports halls The Lighting Handbook The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets IP 54+FF: when increased fire risk IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 ballproof luminaires ballproof luminaires with all-round cover.

Fire protection Luminaire identification marking The following criteria must be taken into account: – Position of normal use – Fire behaviour of environment and mounting surfaces – Minimum clearance from combustible substances and materials Luminaires with thecmark Luminaires which carry thecmark must be constructed so that the temperature on the mounting surface does not exceed 130 °C during abnormal operation. Temperatures must not exceed 220 °C on vertical surfaces. the surface temperature on horizontal surfaces must not exceed 90 °C. 2005. The d luminaire mark was withdrawn in 1999. Luminaires with theQmark Luminaires which carry theQmark are intended for installation in furniture.g. 08. The temperature must not exceed 150 °C on vertical surfaces. in corners of wooden furniture. veneered or varnished. flame-retardant or normally flammable building materials according to DIN 4102. TheUmark introduced in EN 60598 has applied since 01. Luminaires with this mark are suitable for direct mounting on parts of buildings made of non-combustible.08. and does not exceed 180 °C in the event of a ballast fault. The maximum temperature in the event of a fault is 115 °C. The d mark limits the temperature on horizontal surfaces to 95 °C during normal operation and 115 °C in the event of a ballast fault. e. A validity transition period allows the d mark to be used until 01. Luminaires with the q mark Luminaires which carry the q mark are intended for mounting in or on furniture made of materials whose flammability is not known. In order to fulfil the criteria of the Umark. They are designed so that in the event of a ballast fault. The materials may be painted. the same as for the d mark. External surfaces on which readily flammable substances such as dust or fibrous materials may accumulate when luminaires are installed as prescribed must not exceed specific temperatures. Luminaires with the d/Umark Both marks regulate the surface temperatures of luminaires. flame-retardant and normally flammable materials as specified in DIN 4102 cannot be ignited. They are designed so that in normal operation any mounting surface or other adjacent furniture surfaces do not exceed a temperature of 95 °C. 6 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .1998.

Fire protection: Place of use – Mark – Requirements

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 7

Explosion-proofness
Flammable gases, vapours and mists Zone O: A hazardous explosive atmosphere is present continuously or long term. Zone 1: A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur occasionally. Zone 2: A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur only rarely and, if any, short term. Combustible dusts Zone 20 includes areas in which there is a permanent, longterm or frequent explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures. Zone 21 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures can be expected to occur occasionally and short term. Zone 22 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere cannot be expected to occur due to disturbance of deposited dust. If an explosive atmosphere should nevertheless occur, this will most probably happen only rarely and short term.

Directive 94/9/EC The “new” Directive 94/9/EC specifies the requirements for all devices and protection systems for use in explosion-prone areas. Over and above this, this Directive now directly includes the “basic safety requirements” for explosion-proof equipment. Manufacturers of explosion-proof equipment have to provide evidence of a quality assurance system to be tested by a “notified body”.

8 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Directive 99/92 EC (Workplace Directive) Also new is the description of hazard areas in explosion-prone workplaces, and a resulting graded safety profile for the “equipment” used. As this Directive was drafted according to the EC’s “new approach”, the manufacturer’s declaration of conformity, combined with CE marking of the products, was introduced

for explosion-proof equipment as well. A detailed commentary on Directive 94/9/EC is included in the “Directive 94/9/EC by the European Parliament and the Council of 23 March 1994” section. Since 1 July 2003, it has superseded all directives on explosion protection previously effective at European level. Please note: The previous standard on construction and testing of explosion-proof equipment for Zone 2 has been superseded by ILC 60079-15/EN 60079-15, which specifies higher requirements for Zone 2 luminaires (higher requirements in terms of electronic ballasts and impact resistance).

Equipment of Group 2 including potential ignition source
Equipment cat. 1 Equipment cat. 2 Electrical appliance Equipment cat. 3

Yes

No Engine with internal combustion

EC type examination

Documentation of notified body

Documentation of manufacturer

Internal production control

Basic safety and health requirements

Classification of max. surface temperatures in electrical equipment of Class 2
Temperature class T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Max. permissible surface temperature of equipment in °C 450 300 200 135 100 85 Ignition temperatures of flammable substances in °C > 450 > 300 ≤ 450 > 300 ≤ 200 > 200 ≤ 135 > 100 ≤ 135 > 85 ≤ 100

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 9

Requirements concerning safety – ball-proofness
Luminaires for sports halls must be ball-proof according to DIN VDE 0710-13. Balls hitting luminaires must not damage them so as to cause luminaire parts to fall down. In a test conforming with the relevant standard, the luminaire has to withstand 36 hits from three directions at a maximum impact speed of 60 km/h, the ball used having the size of a handball. When choosing the luminaires, the rod guard’s grid width must be matched to the sport played in the hall: it must always be considerably smaller than the balls used, never of the same size, as balls may get stuck in the guard. As ball-proof luminaires, the ZUMTOBEL range includes the RAS/RES-BWS louvre luminaire as well as the COPA-A high-bay luminaire.

10 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Clean-room technology
Clean-room compatibility tested CLEAN Advanced and CLEAN Supreme have been tested and assessed by the Fraunhofer Institute in Stuttgart (Germany) with respect to – clean-room compatibility for clean-rooms (particle emission behaviour of the luminaires) and – cleanliness compatibility (disinfectability, electrostatic behaviour and chemical resistance).

Details on clean-room compatibility: The German VDI 2083 Guideline specifies a standardised procedure for all equipment used in a clean-room. The common criterion for the clean-room compatibility of luminaires and all other equipment is their particle emission behaviour. “Airborne particle emission” is used as a classification criterion in all international standards. The relevant maximum value for the permissible concentration of particles of a specific particle size constitutes the class limit. Test setup A defined volume of air is aspirated by an air sampling probe and fed into a test chamber. The particles inside this test chamber are monitored and recorded appropriately. Exceeding the relevant limit values is decisive in order to classify the luminaires. If a limit value is not exceeded with a certainty of at least 95 %, the respective item of equipment may be regarded as suitable for use in this air cleanliness class.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 11

Details on cleanliness compatibility: In order to be able to confirm cleanliness compatibility as well as quantities reflecting clean-room compatibility that can be detected by metrological methods, additional expert assessments and parameters were included in the tests conducted by the Fraunhofer Institute IPA. Cleanliness compatibility covers a large number of sector-based cleanliness requirements such as resistance to chemicals, surface quality, flow behaviour or electrostatic charge characteristics. These are defined in the following standards and codes of practice, among others: Standardisation General: – classification of air cleanliness – clean-rooms and associated controlled environments according to DIN EN ISO 14644-1 (Federal Standard 209 has been withdrawn) – clean-room technology and clean-room compatibility of equipment VDI 2083 – EHEDG (European Hygienic Engineering & Design Group) Industrial application areas: – GMP Guidelines (Good Manufacturing Practice) – pharmaceuticals – FDA (Food and Drug Administration) – pharmaceuticals and foodstuffs – Medicinal Product Law – EU Pharmaceutical Regulation – Good manufacturing practices Volume 4 – (Medicinal products for human and veterinary use) – Hazard Analytical Control Point (HACCP) Regulations – foodstuffs Hospital application areas: – VDI 2167 Building services in hospitals – DIN 1946-4 Ventilation and air conditioning Part 4 (Ventilation in hospitals)

12 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

which are more expensive to build. The laminar flow system minimises contamination. The CLEAN clean-room luminaire has been designed for use in all clean-room classes with a turbulent mixed airflow. According to GMP (Good Manufacturing Practice) classification. Cleanrooms in ISO Classes 1 to 6 and GMP Classes A and B are areas where this airflow system is used. Clean-rooms with low-turbulence displacement flow. In this commonly encountered airflow system.Airflow systems in clean-rooms: One of the basic criteria for the requirements placed on equipment in clean-rooms is the nature of the airflow system. clean-room Classes C to E and ISO Classes 6 to 9 can be achieved using this airflow system. thereby causing continuous dilution and “cleaning”. allow air to initially enter the cleanroom with low turbulence. The design of laminar flow cleanrooms precludes the use of any luminaires other than extremely slim batten luminaires which disrupt the directional flow of air as little as possible. and any contaminant is quickly eliminated. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 13 . air enters the room with a turbulent flow.

We should be glad to provide further advice if you have any questions or doubts about the resistance of any materials.). cable inlets. dairies. breweries) – Agriculture – Fishing industry – Kitchens and industrial cooking facilities – Car wash facilities – Production facilities and workshops using a high level of oil and grease 3. A great many complaints could be avoided if due consideration were given during the planning stage to the situation in which the luminaire is going to be used. 5. closures. Applications The following applications are just a few examples of situations in which material damage may occur: – Chemical and petrochemical industry – Foodstuffs industry (cheese production. 2. Degree of saturation of chemical substances 14 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook . chemical reactions will take place over a range of temperatures. meat processing. The table on the opposite page can therefore only give a brief overview of effects of some frequently occurring chemicals and is subject to the following conditions: – The chemical substance listed in the table is a basic material and not part of a chemical compound. 4. etc. cover. Ambient temperature Depending on the type and composition of the substances.Chemical effects on materials No material is resistant to all chemical influences. seal. The effects of chemicals vary widely and take up entire volumes of resistance tables. Chemical composition The chemical composition should be discussed with every operator. Luminaire materials A luminaire consists of several parts having different functions and which are therefore made from different materials (base plate. – The ambient temperature is 22 °C. What are the key factors? 1.

carbonate The Lighting Handbook Acetic acid up to 5 % Acetic acid up to 30 % Acetone Alcohol up to 30 % Alcohol. crude oil Dioxan Ether Ethyl acetate (ester) Glycerine Glycol Glysantin Hydrochloric acid up to 20 % above 20 % Hydrogen peroxide up to 40 % over 40 % • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • – – • • • – • • • • • • • • • • • – • • • – – • • • • • • • • • – • • • • • – • • • – – • • • – • – • • • • – – – • • • – • • • • • – – • – – • – • • – – • • – • – • • – • • – – • – – – • • • • • – • • • – • – • – – – • • – • – • • – – – – – • – – – • • • • • • • • = resistant.. – = not resistant Chapter 7 / 15 .Polymeth.Polyester acrylate.Chemical substance in question Stainless Alusteel minium Poly. • = resistant to limited extent. concentrated Aliphatic hydrocarbons Ammonia 25 % Aniline Aromatic hydrocarbons Battery acid Beer Benzene Blood Bromic acid Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Carbon tetrachloride Caustic soda solution 2 % Caustic soda solution 10 % Chloroform Chlorophenol Diesel oil.

Polyester acrylate. – = not resistant 16 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .carbonate Ketones Lime milk Lysol Methylene chloride Methanol Metal salts and their aqueous solutions Naphtha (cleaner’s naphtha) Petrolium ether Pyridine Phenol Nitric acid up to 10 % up to 20 % above 20 % Sea water Soap-suds Soda Sodium chloride solution Sulphuretted hydrogen Sulphuric acid up to 50 % up to 70 % above 70 % Sulphurous acid up to 5 % Synthetic detergents Turpentine Water up to 60°C Xylene • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • – – – • • • • • • – • • • – • • • • – – • • • – • • – – – • • • • • – • – – – • • • – – • • – • • • • • • • – • • • • – – • – – – • • • – – • • – • • • • • • • – • • • • – – • – – – • • • – – • • – • • • • • • • – – • • • – • = resistant. • = resistant to limited extent.Polymeth.Chemical substance in question Stainless Alusteel minium Poly..

a larger number of units may be possible.k.k. correction Loading of automatic circuit breakers for metal halide lamps – Maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Electronic ballasts for metal halide lamps.k.f.5 mm2 20 20 14 14 6 10 6 B16 1./p.5 mm2 60 60 42 42 20 30 20 B10 1.5 mm2 15 15 8 8 4 6 4 B13 1. 1/18 W T26 44/53 73/86 1/36–38 W T26 38/53 63/86 1/58 W T26 25/34 40/56 1/5–7 W TC-S 83/135 136/221 1/9 W TC-S 93/135 153/221 1/11 W TC-S 104/135 170/221 1/10–13 W TC-D 72/122 119/200 1/18 W TC-D/-T 62/91 102/149 1/26 W TC-D/-T 43/68 71/112 1/18 W TC-L/-F 44/53 73/86 1/24 W TC-L/-F 41/53 68/86 1/36 W TC-L/-F 38/53 62/86 n. n. = shunt p. A101/A201/A202) C10 1./p. Chapter 7 / 17 ./p. 27/32 43/51 53/63 23/32 37/51 46/63 15/20 24/33 30/41 50/81 80/130 100/162 56/81 90/130 112/162 63/81 100/130 125/162 44/74 70/118 87/147 37/55 60/88 75/110 26/41 42/66 52/82 27/32 43/51 53/63 25/32 40/51 50/63 23/32 37/51 46/63 p.5 mm2 25 25 18 18 7 13 7 B20 2.k. k.k. correction (inductive) B10 B16 B20 n. k.f.Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits Miniature circuit breakers Trip characteristic B C D Rangeh over 3 ln to 5 ln over 5 ln to 10 ln over 10 ln to 20 ln Maximum number of fluorescent lamps per miniature circuit breaker Number of fluorescent lamps with conventional or low-loss ballast for different lamp circuits C10 C16 n.k.5 mm2 30 30 18 18 7 13 7 The Lighting Handbook 1/20 W HI 1/35 W HI 2/35 W HI 1/70 W HI 2/70 W HI 1/100 W HI 1/150 W HI Depending on type of unit.k. except for PCI. = no p.k. non-dimmable (TRIDONIC.k.5 mm2 30 30 14 14 7 10 7 C13 1.k.ATCO PCI series. n. n./p.5 mm2 40 40 25 25 14 18 14 C16 1...5 mm2 50 50 36 36 20 26 20 C20 2./p.

5 mm2 62 50 60 40 52 30 52 32 24 50 22 50 22 C16 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 mm2 22 18 20 15 19 11 19 12 9 18 8 18 8 B13 1.5 mm2 31 25 30 20 26 15 26 16 12 25 11 25 11 B16 1.5 1.5 mm2 74 60 80 52 60 38 60 38 32 60 26 60 26 C20 2.5 mm2 37 30 40 26 30 19 30 19 16 30 13 30 13 B20 2.Loading of automatic circuit breakers for electronic ballasts for fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps – Maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps. non-dimming (TRIDONIC.5 mm2 52 36 46 32 36 21 36 22 20 35 15 35 15 18 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook 1/18 W 2/18 W 3/18 W 4/18 W 1/30 W 2/30 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 3/36 W 1/58 W 2/58 W 1/70 W 2/70 W T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 .5 2.ATCO PC T8 PRO series) C10 1.5 1.5 mm2 104 72 92 64 72 42 72 44 40 70 30 70 30 B10 1.5 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 1x14/21/28/35 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2x14/21/28/35 W T16 18 24 28 34 9 12 14 17 3/14 W T16 26 38 44 64 13 19 22 32 4/14 W T16 26 38 44 64 13 19 22 32 1/24 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/24 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 3/24 W T16 14 18 22 28 7 9 11 14 4/24 W T16 14 18 22 28 7 9 11 14 1/39 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/39 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18 1/49 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/49 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18 1/54 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/54 W T16 14 20 24 30 7 10 12 15 1/80 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 22 2/80 W T16 8 14 16 20 4 7 8 10 Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps.ATCO PC T5 PRO lp series) C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 1.5 mm2 44 36 40 30 40 22 38 24 18 36 16 36 16 C13 1. non-dimming (TRIDONIC.5 1.

5 mm2 80 46 30 28 76 30 76 30 76 30 46 30 B10 1.5 mm2 150 78 34 34 120 60 78 48 76 30 150 48 70 30 48 26 48 26 28 20 C20 2.5 mm2 90 46 21 19 75 32 46 26 43 16 90 26 43 16 26 13 26 13 14 11 1/14 W 2/14 W 3/14 W 4/14 W 1/21 W 2/21 W 1/28 W 2/28 W 1/35 W 2/35 W 1/24 W 2/24 W 1/39 W 2/39 W 1/49 W 2/49 W 1/54 W 2/54 W 1/80 W 2/80 W T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps.5 mm2 180 92 42 38 150 64 92 52 86 32 180 52 86 32 52 26 52 26 28 22 B10 1.Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps. dimmable (TRIDONIC.5 mm2 38 20 12 12 35 15 35 15 35 15 20 15 B20 2.5 mm2 15 10 8 6 15 5 15 5 15 5 10 5 B13 1.5 mm2 50 38 16 16 50 30 38 24 34 16 50 24 34 16 24 12 24 12 14 10 C13 1.5 mm2 50 30 18 16 50 20 50 20 50 20 30 20 C16 1.5 mm2 25 19 8 8 25 15 19 12 17 8 25 12 17 8 12 6 12 6 7 5 B13 1.5 mm2 76 40 24 24 70 30 70 30 70 30 40 30 C20 2.5 mm2 25 15 9 8 25 10 25 10 25 10 15 10 B16 1.5 mm2 40 27 13 12 40 20 27 17 25 11 40 17 25 11 17 9 17 9 10 7 B16 1.ATCO PCA T8 ECO/EXCEL one4all series) C10 1.5 mm2 80 54 26 24 80 40 54 34 50 22 80 34 50 22 34 18 34 18 20 14 C16 1.5 mm2 75 39 17 17 60 30 39 24 38 15 75 24 38 15 24 13 24 13 14 10 B20 2.ATCO PCA T5 ECO/EXCEL one4all (lp) series) C10 1. dimmable (TRIDONIC.5 mm2 40 23 15 14 38 15 38 15 38 15 23 15 The Lighting Handbook 1/18 W 2/18 W 3/18 W 4/18 W 1/30 W 2/30 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/38 W 2/38 W 1/58 W 2/58 W T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 Chapter 7 / 19 .5 mm2 30 20 16 12 30 10 30 10 30 10 20 10 C13 1.

ATCO PCA TCL ECO/ EXCEL one4all series) C10 1.Electronic ballasts for TC-L fluorescent lamps.5 mm2 20 30 76 30 76 30 46 20 30 B10 1.5 mm2 15 12 15 12 19 12 19 7 14 4 B13 1.5 mm2 16 24 70 30 70 30 40 18 30 C20 2.5 mm2 6 10 25 10 25 10 15 7 10 B16 1.5 mm2 10 16 30 10 30 10 20 10 10 C13 1.5 mm2 40 32 40 32 54 34 54 24 38 14 C16 1.5 mm2 48 38 48 38 76 44 78 28 50 18 C20 2.5 mm2 30 23 30 23 45 25 45 17 30 10 1/18 W 2/18 W 1/24 W 2/24 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/40 W 2/40 W 1/55 W 2/55 W TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps.5 mm2 10 15 38 15 38 15 23 10 15 2/18 W 2/24 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/40 W 2/40 W 1/55 W 2/55 W 1/80 W TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L 20 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .5 mm2 8 12 35 15 35 15 20 9 15 B20 2.ATCO PC TCL PRO series) C10 1. non-dimmable (TRIDONIC.5 mm2 5 8 15 5 15 5 10 5 5 B13 1.5 mm2 20 16 20 16 27 17 27 12 19 7 B16 1. Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC.5 mm2 12 20 50 20 50 20 30 14 20 C16 1.5 mm2 60 46 60 46 90 50 90 34 60 20 B10 1.5 mm2 30 24 30 24 38 24 38 14 28 8 C13 1.5 mm2 24 19 24 19 38 22 39 14 25 9 B20 2.

5 2. nondimmable (TRIDONIC.5 1.5 mm2 mm2 80 80 60 64 80 80 60 64 70 76 46 68 70 76 46 56 50 58 24 28 50 58 24 28 22 26 B10 1.5 2 mm mm2 100 24 64 16 98 23 60 16 100 24 64 16 98 23 60 16 100 24 100 24 84 17 44 11 84 17 44/30 11/7 84 17 30 7 B13 B16 B20 1.ATCO PC PRO series) C10 1.5 2.5 mm2 48 32 46 32 48 32 46 32 48 48 34 22 34 22/14 34 14 C13 1.5 mm2 mm2 40 60 28 40 40 60 28 40 30 50 22 32 30 50 22 32 26 38 10 18 26 38 12 18 12 16 C16 C20 1.5 mm2 72 44 70 44 72 44 70 44 72 72 46 32 46 32/18 46 18 C16 1.5 1.5 mm2 30 20 30 20 25 15 25 16 19 9 19 9 8 B16 1.5 mm2 80 54 78 52 80 54 78 52 80 80 74 38 74 38/22 74 22 C20 B10 2.Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL fluorescent lamps.5 2 2 mm mm mm2 36 40 50 22 27 32 35 39 49 22 26 30 36 40 50 22 27 32 35 39 49 22 26 30 36 40 50 36 40 50 23 37 42 16 19 22 23 37 42 16/9 19/11 22/15 23 37 42 9 11 15 1/9 W TC-SEL 2/9 W TC-SEL 1/10 W TC-DEL 2/10 W TC-DEL 1/11 W TC-SEL 2/11 W TC-SEL 1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL compact fluorescent lamps.ATCO PCA TCD/TCT ECO/EXCEL one4all series) C10 C13 1.5 mm2 20 14 20 14 15 11 15 11 13 5 13 6 6 B13 1.5 mm2 40 32 40 32 38 34 38 28 29 14 29 14 13 1/11 W TC-SEL 2/11 W TC-SEL 1/13 W TC-DEL 2/13 W TC-DEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/57 W TC-TEL The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 21 .5 mm2 40 30 40 30 35 23 35 23 25 12 25 12 11 B20 2.5 1. Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC.

5* 400 4. uncompensated Lamp values W A 35 0.5 A ** with OGLS 400 . uncompensated Lamp values W A 50 0.6 80 0.25 700 5.77 70 1 100 1. 4.53 70 0. ballast and lamp current of approx.98 150 1.8 250 3 400 3...4 Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 9 14 18 22 6 10 13 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 6 9 11 14 4 6 8 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 B25 16 12 10 7 4 2 Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps.8 125 1.4 Number of ballasts per automatic C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 10 15 18 23 8 6 9 11 14 6 4 7 7 9 4 2 3 3 4 2 1 2 2 2 1 – 1 1 1 – circuit breaker B16 B20 B25 13 16 20 10 12 15 7 9 10 3 4 5 2 3 3 1 1 1 22 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .15 250 2.15 400 3.4 A Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps. 3. uncompensated Lamp values W A 50 0.4** Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25 11 18 23 29 9 15 18 23 7 11 14 17 5 8 9 12 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 2 * with OGLI 400 .8 250 3 400 4.Loading of automatic circuit breakers for high-pressure lamps – Maximum recommended number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps...2 150 1. ballast and lamp current of approx.

ballast and lamp current of approx.53 70 0.. compensated Lamp values W A 35 0.5 A ** with OGLS 400 .8 250 3 400 3.. compensated Lamp values W A 50 0.4** ComNumber of ballasts per automatic pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 6 22 36 45 50 11 12 12 18 23 29 8 20 7 11 14 17 5 32 5 7 9 11 3 35 3 5 7 8 2 45 3 4 5 7 2 circuit breaker B16 18 13 8 5 4 3 B20 23 16 10 6 5 4 B25 27 20 12 8 6 5 * with OGLI 400 .25 700 5.4 A Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps..98 150 1.77 70 1 100 1.15 400 3.2 150 1.8 125 1..4 ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25 7 19 31 39 49 10 15 18 23 8 12 19 24 30 6 9 11 14 10 7 12 15 19 4 6 7 9 18 4 6 7 9 2 3 3 4 25 2 4 5 6 1 2 2 2 40 1 2 2 3 – 1 1 1 All data refer to a rated voltage of 230 V 50 Hz.5* 400 4. 4.8 250 3 400 4.4 ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 10 16 24 31 38 11 17 22 12 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 12 10 16 20 25 7 11 14 20 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 36 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 45 3 4 5 7 2 3 4 B25 27 20 17 12 8 5 Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 23 . ballast and lamp current of approx. compensated Lamp values W A 50 0.6 80 0.Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps. 3.15 250 2.

24 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .r.ATCO OGT series) Power 250 W 300 W 500 W C10 3–4 2 1 C16 5–6 3–4 1–2 B10 1–2 1 n.ATCO TMAx/TMDx series) Power 20 W 35 W 40 W 50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W 105 W C10 42 35 26 23 21 16 13 9 C16 67 56 43 37 33 26 21 14 B10 21 17 13 11 10 8 6 4 B16 33 28 21 18 16 13 10 7 Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.Loading of automatic circuit breakers for low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps – Maximum recommended number of transformers per automatic circuit breaker Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.r.r.r.ATCO TMBx/OMTx series) Power 20 W 35 W 50 W 70 W 80 W 105 W 150 W 210 W 300 W C10 58 41 21 15 14 8 4 2–3 1–2 C16 93 65 35 24 22 13 6 4–5 2–3 B10 29 20 10 7 7 4 2 1 n. B16 2–3 1–2 n. n.r. = not recommended Because of the high starting current of halogen incandescent lamps. we recommend to use automatic circuit breakers with C characteristics. B16 46 32 17 12 11 6 3 2 1 n. = not recommended Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.

08 0.02 ǩ Lh 140 % ǩ = luminous flux Lh = service life Voltage as % of nominal voltage Operation at rated load Magnetic transformers should be operated at rated load as far as possible so as to avoid any rise in the secondary voltage which can result in a reduction in lamp service life (5 % overvoltage corresponds to 30 % shorter life). 3 however.5 0. 50 Multiplication factor for relative operating values 30 20 10 8 6 4 2 Lh ǩ 1= 100 % 0.03 0.3 to approx. 1.6 halogen lamp. large currents flow on the secondary side.8 0.4 0. Conductor cross-sections and voltage drop Because the voltages are small. For a 12 V halogen lamp.15 60 % 80 % 100 % 120 % A 1 V overvoltage is insignificant for a 230 W halogen 4 lamp.7 0.3 0. 7 6 5 0.2 hours. Voltage changes on the line side are transferred to the secondary side in the same ratio.06 0. this can result in considerable voltage drops.200 0.2 0.04 0.000 hours 0.6 0. If conductors are long and have small crosssections. Crosssections must be chosen so that the voltage drop across the conductor between transformer and lamp does not exceed 5 %.8 0.g. this represents an 2 overvoltage of 8 % which re1 = duces the average 100% service life of the 0.1 0.4 from 3. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 25 . e. 0.Low-voltage installation Service life and luminous flux The service life and luminous flux of low-voltage halogen lamps are extremely voltage dependent.

however.5 2.5 1.5 4 200 VA 4 4 up to 6 m 1.5 4 6 10 up to 10 m up to 12 m 1.5 4 6 6 10 10 10 16 Installation The distance between transformer and lamps must be as short as possible (minimum distance. there is often unwanted humming. On the other hand.Required conductor cross-sections in mm2 as a function of transformer rating and cable length (one-way line length) for magnetic transformers: Transformer rating Cable length in m up to 2 m up to 4 m 20 VA 1.5 150 VA 2.5 1OO VA 1.5 2.5 1. 26 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .5 4 6 6 up to 8 m 1.5 2. cables must be laid in a star configuration and be of equal length to ensure that all lamps receive the same voltage. therefore the transformer must be installed out of earshot if possible. is approx. Transformer Wherever possible.5 1.5 50 VA 1.5 1. especially when lighting is adjusted. 30 cm) in order to avoid the relatively large conductor cross-sections.

. Please note that transformers for use in areas which present fire risks must carry the appropriate conformity mark (e.Transformers and light regulation Only approved safety transformers should be used. The ambient temperature must not exceed 50 °C max. The necessary safety distances from the illuminated surface also apply when using spotlights. . Safety measures when operating low-voltage halogen lamps Low-voltage halogen lamps generate a huge amount of heat. Reverse phase control Halogen lamps are operated with an electronic transformer in the high-frequency range.g. Important: do not exceed maximum conductor length. ). make sure there is adequate heat removal and that the safety distances from combustible materials are observed. In the case of recessed luminaires. Phase control Halogen lamps are operated with a magnetic transformer. These are identified by the following symbol and details of the relevant distance in metres: …m The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 27 . .

.

. . Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment . . . . . . 3 – 11 4 – 11 12 – 19 13 14 – 17 18 19 20 – 23 21 – 22 23 24 – 28 27 – 28 29 – 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refurbishment of lighting systems . Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires . Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Economic efficiency calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 8 Checklists The five steps of lighting design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Economic analysis . . . Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of burning hours . . . . . . . Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) . . . . . . Checklist according to the five steps of lighting design. . . . . . . .

The Lighting Handbook .

Dr. in particular DSE workstations. ELI (Ergonomic Lighting Indicator) was developed in collaboration with ETH Zurich and TU Ilmenau (Prof. luminaires and lighting management – Calculate NUMBER of luminaires required – POSITION luminaires and lighting control – ANALYSE the results From experience we know that usually Step 1 = Determine lighting requirements is not taken into account sufficiently. Accordingly. requirements are broken down as follows: – General conditions – Lighting quality requirements – visual performance – vista – visual comfort – vitality – empowerment The lighting quality criteria are in line with those set by the EU. Chapter 8 / 3 . The formulations for assessment differ from the requirements (ELI assessment). Understanding this task will allow for proper development of a well thought-out lighting solution based on the quality characteristics of lighting (Chapter 1) and project-specific requirements. The Lighting Handbook A checklist for workplace analysis (page 11) is provided for easy identification of technical lighting equipment at workplaces. the requirement criteria are taken into account. The checklist below should help the user to consider key questions for clarifying basic requirements. Schierz). In the process.The five steps of lighting design = help for structuring the lighting design scheme – Determine lighting REQUIREMENTS – SELECT lamps. Analysis includes the assessment of lighting quality.

.. passageways..Checklist according to the five steps of lighting design 1.. . ... … . Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance. .. Checked ✓ At the workstations. circulation areas Multi-task areas Arrangement and material of furniture Protection types (foreign bodies and humidity) Protection classes (electrical installations) Influence by chemicals Fire protection Emergency lighting Energy consumption limits (kWh/year) Maximum power requirement (W/m²) Budget for initial installation Lighting quality requirements (ELI requirements) Criterion A – Visual performance How well should the visual task be recognised? Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Lighting requirements General conditions Utilization of room Size and height of room Ceiling structure Reflection factors Window areas Doors. visual tasks are the same across the whole area. colour distinction is required to a common extent. standard visual tasks have to be performed.. 4 / Chapter 8 -2 -1 0* 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 The Lighting Handbook . no extraordinary changes of viewing direction occur.

..... .. the room should provide a bright and inviting impression. . … . the first visual impression will be decisive... . the lighting concept should facilitate orientation in the room... . the cleanliness of the room and the lighting will be of major importance.. the perceptible quality of the luminaire will be of major importance. . the lighting concept should blend in smoothly with the interior design. it will be particularly important to identify three-dimensional structures in the room.. . 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vista Criterion C – Visual comfort How much visual comfort is required in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area.. corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual task Criterion B – Vista How do you want to experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings.... * Minimum criterion. the field of vision should be free from sources of glare. light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. hard shadows must be avoided.Within the visual task area. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room. In the project planned. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. .. users must be particularly protected from annoying sources of glare. In the project planned. .. but also for perception in the room... The Lighting Handbook -2 -1 0 * 1 2 .. -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Chapter 8 / 5 . . 1 = does not apply at all. .. In the project planned.. .. the lighting concept should be properly geared towards expectations..... for example.. ... reflections must be avoided.

.. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. should make people feel good. ...... the room should be illuminated uniformly. . In the project planned.. 6 / Chapter 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 The Lighting Handbook 1 2 3 4 5 . In the project planned. 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vitality Criterion E – Empowerment To what extent should the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements.. should stimulate people.. The artificial lighting should be controlled by daylight sensors. . it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes. a variety of tasks must be taken into account. the effect to be created should be as natural as possible.. the user should be able to personally influence the lighting situation.. In the area around the visual task. special emphasis is put on protection against sources of annoyance or adverse health effects... * Minimum criterion. In the project planned.. it should be possible in particular to adjust the lighting to the brightness level required. corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual comfort Criterion D – Vitality How positive should the light’s influence be on people? Explanation: Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-being. . . visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation.. The lighting concept… . 1 = does not apply at all.. people’s circadian rhythm should be particularly taken into account.. there must be no flickering light. The lighting should be switched automatically.. ... larger dark areas should be avoided... daylight must be taken into account.. . . Moreover. .. .

The lighting should be controlled on the basis of time. Any future layout changes should be taken into account.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Empowerment

ELI – LENI requirements
Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart.

Visual performance

A

2

1 0 5

E
Empowerment

4

3

-1 2 1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 2 3

4

5B Vista

3 4 5

D
Vitality

C
Visual comfort

ELI

60

120

0
kWh/m a
2

180

LENI Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 8 / 7

2. Selection of lamps, luminaires and lighting management Lamp type Luminaire range and model Lighting management range and modules 3. Calculate number of luminaires required Rough calculation (Quickplan/Quickcalc) Detailed calculation (Dialux/Relux) Planning conditions (maintenance, reflection) 4. Positioning of luminaires and lighting control Positioning the luminaires – structural situation – orientation (avoid reflections and glare) – spacings between luminaires (regular patterns) – peripheries – alignment techn. infrastructure (distribution cabinet, clamping compartment, …) Position of control gear Emergency lighting 5. Analysis of results Lighting quality analysis (ELI assessment) Criterion A – Visual performance
How well can the visual task be recognised?

Checked ✓

Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.

In the main visual task area, the lighting … ... provides uniformity of illuminance. ... complies with the colour rendition index. 8 / Chapter 8
-2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

The Lighting Handbook

... complies with the maintenance value of illuminance.

-2 -1 0 * 1 2

In the area around the visual task, the illuminance level required is achieved. In the lighting installation as it exists at present, … ... annoying hard shadows, ... irritating direct glare ... and annoying reflections are avoided.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards

-2 -1 0 1 2

-2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual task

Please note: EN 12464 specifies standard values; values may be lower only if visual tasks are modified. Where there are several task areas, calculate and assess the mean value for all of them.

Criterion B – Vista
How do you experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room.

The lighting concept … ... enhances interior design features. ... fulfils my personal expectations. ... takes passageways, circulation areas and activity zones into consideration. ... creates a hierarchy of perception (lighting focuses). The luminaires make a high-quality impression. The luminaires are neither soiled nor affected by other foreign substances.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Vista

Criterion C – Visual comfort
How much visual comfort is provided in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. -2 -1 0 * 1 2

The lighting solution produces no glare (UGR).
The Lighting Handbook

The lighting components are balanced and matched to the room. The ceiling and walls are pleasantly bright.

-2 -1 0 1 2

-2 -1 0 1 2

Chapter 8 / 9

The lighting solution … ... takes daylight into account and uses it. ... does not flicker. ... does not allow major dark areas in the room. The task area environment is uniformly illuminated.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

Mean value Visual comfort

Criterion D – Vitality
How positive is the light’s influence on the people? Explanation: Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-being. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes.

The lighting … ... is one of the factors that make me feel good. ... has a stimulating effect. ... adjusts to the brightness level required. The lighting creates a natural, pleasant effect. The lighting stabilises/enhances the users’ circadian rhythm. There are no sources of annoyance or adverse health effects.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Vitality

Criterion E – Empowerment
To what extent does the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. 1 2 3 4 5

The installation can be switched or dimmed. A variety of lighting scenes can be called up.

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Presence detectors make sure that the lighting switches automatically. Thanks to daylight sensors, the artificial lighting adjusts to daylight changes over the course of the day. Automated, dynamic scenes are available. 10 / Chapter 8

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

The Lighting Handbook

Luminaires and switches can be rearranged flexibly. The luminaires are arranged so as to allow for flexible change in room utilisation without major effort.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Empowerment

ELI – LENI assessments
Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart.
Visual performance

A

2

1 0 5

E
Empowerment

4

3

-1 2 1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 2 3

4

5B Vista

3 4 5

D
Vitality

C
Visual comfort

ELI 60 120

0
kWh/m2 a

180

LENI Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19 Other analyses Situation regarding standards Economic efficiency
The Lighting Handbook

Budget Documentation Methods of presentation Chapter 8 / 11

Maintenance of lighting systems
Today, the maintenance of lighting installations is a decisive factor in an installation’s balance of costs. According to the formula below (1), a lighting level required of Em = 500 lx at a standard maintenance factor of MF = 0.67 implies a new illuminance level of Enew = 750 lx. Em: maintained illuminance = maintenance value of illuminance (1) Em = Enew x MF (maintenance factor) Benefit of a high MF: – lower luminaire investment costs – reduced energy costs Benefit of a low MF: – low maintenance costs – longer maintenance intervals

Please note: at a lower maintenance factor, illuminance may be constantly dimmed to the maintenance value to save energy (maintenance control). The maintenance factor includes 4 components: (2) MF = LLMF x LSF x LMF x RMF All these factors describe the decrease in illuminance. The maximum in each case is 1, corresponding to the new value. At the respective time of maintenance, the various causes of the decrease in illuminance must be identified.
Maintenance factor components Causes of illuminance decrease

Lamp luminous flux mainten. factor LLMF Lamp survival factor LSF Luminaire maintenance factor LMF Room maintenance factor RMF

Ageing of lamps Failure of lamps Soiling of luminaire Soiling of room

12 / Chapter 8

The Lighting Handbook

Options for improving the maintenance factor: – Lamp replacement already before the lamp service life ends (LLWF/LSF ) – Immediate replacement of lamps in case of failure (LSF = 1) – Use of closed luminaires (LWF7 ) – More frequent room cleaning (RWF7 )

restaurants. Ambient condition Very Clean Maintenance Working interval areas recommended Clean-rooms. “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”. welding shops.5 1. foundries. schools Shops.5 3. data 3 years centres. assembly bays Steel works.5 2.57 Soiled 1 year 0.5 Environmental conditions In case you are not familiar with the application.0 1.50 The Lighting Handbook According to CIE – volume 97. grinding shops.160 % 140 % 120 % 100 % 80 % 60 % 40 % 20 % 0. at 2005 Chapter 8 / 13 . wood processing Reference maintenance factor 0. laboratories. chemical plants.0 0. the tables below will help you calculate the accurate maintenance factor according to formula (2).80 Clean Normal 0. warehouses.0 years 2. however. the following standard values apply.67 0. assembly workstations for electronic components 3 years 2 years Offices.0 Example: Luminaire maintenance: every year Room surface maintenance: every 3 years Lamp replacement: every 3 years Faulty lamp replacement: immediately = Enew = Em 3.

00 0.97 0.94 0.96 0.50 1.97 0.000 1.00 1.97 0.00 1.000 10.91 0.99 0.88 0.99 0.93 0.92 0.94 0.000 16.93 1.96 0.94 0.89 0.82 0.93 0.000 14.00 1. lamp.) triple-band fluor.99 0.00 1.92 0.90 0.90 0.000 35.89 1.97 0.00 1.93 0.91 0.99 0.99 0.00 1. long-life AURA SUPREME T5 HO LL (long life) LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF Burning hours 100 500 1.00 1.99 0.00 0.92 0.90 0.88 1.00 0.000 1.00 1.00 1.000 22.00 0.00 1.93 0.98 0.00 1.99 0.92 0.00 0.98 0.000 24.98 0.00 0.000 30.92 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.98 0.98 The Lighting Handbook .95 0.75 0.89 0.98 0.70 1.98 0.98 0.00 1.000 4.95 0.78 0.) triple-band fluor.98 0.90 0.98 0.95 0.90 0.96 0.91 1.Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF) 14 / Chapter 8 Lamps Incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 Halogen incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) single-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) triple-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (electronic ballast) triple-band fluor.00 1.00 0.99 0.72 1.00 1.94 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.92 0.90 0.00 1.91 0.00 1.95 0.97 0.78 0.90 1.90 1.000 40.90 0.99 0.99 0. long-life AURA Ultimate LL (long life) T16 (electronic ballast) triple-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T16 (el.98 0.60 1. long-life Philips MASTER TL-D Xtreme (long life) T26 (el.96 0.000 18.00 0.91 0.00 1. lamp.00 1.000 8.00 1. ball.94 0.78 0.00 1.97 0.99 0.98 0.000 6.98 0.00 0.00 0.93 0.95 0.98 0.00 1. ball.99 0.91 0.99 0.00 1.91 0.92 0.00 1.00 1.99 1. lamp ZVEI 2005/CIE97:2005 T26 (el.95 0.90 0.00 1.94 0.88 0.00 1.97 0.92 0.00 0.83 0.00 1.97 0.95 0.93 0.97 0.97 0.91 0.94 0.99 0.91 1.90 0.00 1.00 0.99 0.00 1.99 0.500 2. ball.98 0.90 0.96 0.93 0.99 0.000 12.93 0.00 1.) triple-band fluor.96 0.90 0.000 45.91 0.95 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.00 1.98 0.00 1. lamp.00 1.99 0.98 0.98 0.00 1.97 0.00 1.99 0.96 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.89 0.99 0.90 0.90 0.94 0.80 0.50 1.00 1.99 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.97 0.76 0.00 1.90 0.60 1.94 0.00 0.00 1.99 0.00 1.93 0.00 1.94 0.99 0.00 1.00 0.92 0.97 0.50 1.99 0.00 0.50 1.73 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.00 1.00 1.96 0.95 0.95 0.000 20.99 0.90 0.99 0.97 0.00 1.

00 0.00 0.97 0.87 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.79 0.88 0.93 0.85 1.88 0.94 0.00 0.97 0.83 0.87 0.96 0.98 0.00 0.00 1.94 Chapter 8 / 15 Values acc. acc.00 1.88 0.97 0.96 0.75 h ON.25 h OFF).98 0.86 0.89 0.96 0.00 0. . For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types. TC-TEL 5-42W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor.75 0.98 0.98 0.93 0.95 0.83 0.89 0.91 0.80 0.99 0.91 0.82 0.99 0.79 1.99 0. please contact the respective manufacturer directly.00 0.95 0.90 0.98 0.95 0. to CIE97:2005 Technical report “Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems” 2nd edition.00 1.98 0.98 0.00 1. 0.89 1.97 0.96 0.97 0.82 0.94 0.80 0.99 0.98 0.99 0.80 0.90 0.90 0. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 18-36W (low-loss ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 18-80W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor.62 1.99 0.94 0.50 1.00 1.00 1.86 0.55 1.00 1.99 0.90 0.97 0.98 0.90 0.78 1.98 0.00 1.85 0.99 0.94 0.91 0.00 1.89 0.93 0.99 0.92 0.00 0.97 0.98 0.83 0.00 1. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-DEL 10-26W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor.93 0.50 1.00 1.87 0.84 0.00 0. lamp ZVEI 2005 Induction lamp Philips QL LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF 1.90 0.00 1.81 0. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite.97 0.99 0.92 0.98 0.00 1.99 0. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-SEL.79 0.98 0. January 2008.00 0.99 0.99 0.96 0. TC-T 5-26W (low-loss ballast) Compact fluor.00 1.97 0.97 0.00 0.77 0.98 0. to IEC (2.00 1.00 1.94 0.00 0.00 1.00 1.98 0.The Lighting Handbook and lamp survival factor (LSF) Compact fluorescent lamp CIE97:2005 TC-S. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival.84 0.81 0.99 0.00 1.00 0.76 0.00 1.75 1. to specifications by lamp manufacturers.60 1.99 0.00 1.94 0.97 0.60 1.98 0.86 0.85 0.78 1. TC-D.90 0.00 1.97 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.92 0.00 0.00 0. and ZVEI publication “Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting” of November 2005.00 1.00 1. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc.95 0.80 0.88 1.99 0.

00 0.60 0.69 1.75 1.99 0.75 0.87 0.50 The Lighting Handbook .93 0.00 0.99 0.000 6.99 0.00 0.86 0.98 0.91 0.86 0.98 0.88 0.00 1.00 1.98 0.71 0.77 0.98 0.98 0.80 0.60 0.70 1.55 0.000 12.96 0.85 0.68 0.50 1.50 1.97 0.86 0.93 0.96 0.000 22.000 35.91 0.88 0.80 0.99 0.00 0.98 0.000 40.78 0.80 1.97 0.73 0.00 0.80 0.00 1.71 1.99 0.99 0.87 0.98 0.91 0.72 0.88 0.75 0.81 0.000 10.97 0.99 0.92 0.61 1.86 0.99 0.98 0.99 0.73 0.69 1.000 30.56 0.95 0.00 0.94 0.97 0.90 0.86 0.000 16.00 1.68 0.70 0.90 0.63 0.99 0.73 0.00 0.95 0.65 0.00 0.93 0.95 0.000 18.99 0.76 0.93 0.85 0.72 0.70 0.00 0.50 1.85 0.95 0.96 0.00 1.53 0.77 0.98 0.70 0.80 0.000 14.97 0.69 0.98 0.97 0.92 0.000 20.79 0.97 0.72 0.95 0.69 1.88 0.50 0.59 0.84 0.98 0.80 0.99 0.98 0.Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF) 16 / Chapter 8 Lamps Metal halide lamp Ceramic (50-150W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Ceramic Philips CDM-T 70W/Elite Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI-T 150W/WDL PB Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI 250W PB Metal halide lamp Quartz (250/400W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 250W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 400W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-BT 400W/N Metal halide lamp Quartz Philips HPI-T Plus 250/400W LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF Burning hours 100 500 1.00 1.92 0.80 0.75 0.87 0.00 0.90 0.85 0.84 0.00 1.99 0.89 0.000 1.79 0.87 0.87 0.00 0.74 0.91 0.98 0.000 45.00 0.96 0.86 0.61 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.64 0.65 1.83 0.000 24.78 0.81 0.92 0.70 0.00 0.95 0.66 0.91 0.73 0.99 0.000 8.92 0.00 1.71 0.00 0.00 0.83 0.98 0.87 0.500 2.80 0.98 0.83 0.95 0.00 0.96 0.63 0.75 0.62 1.74 0.79 0.000 1.56 1.70 0.99 0.000 4.98 0.79 0.90 0.61 1.

97 0.98 0.99 0.90 0.92 0.93 0.75 h ON.90 0.94 0.80 0.000W ZVEI 2005 Mercury vapour lamp Philips HPL-N 50-400W Sodium vapour lamp 50/70W ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150–400W (standard luminous flux) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150–400W (higher luminous flux) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp Philips SON(-T) PIA Plus 100–400W LSF 1.79 0.90 0.87 0.98 0.93 0.96 0.89 0.81 0.93 0.93 0.98 0.63 0. and ZVEI publication “Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting” of November 2005.91 0.98 0.99 0.00 0.00 1.50 1.98 0.90 LSF 1.71 0.93 0.91 0.98 0.00 1.98 0.87 0.88 0.70 1.86 0.89 0.92 0.00 0.73 0.50 1.25 h OFF).00 0.00 1.96 0. please contact the respective manufacturer directly.99 0.99 0.98 0.99 0.93 0.98 0.77 0.98 0. 0. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite.97 0.99 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.97 0.84 0.87 0.87 0.83 0.77 0.92 0.00 0.00 1.00 1.87 0.00 0.91 0.92 0. acc.92 0.55 0. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival.97 0.91 0.92 0.00 0.95 0.00 1.83 0.92 0.98 0. to IEC (2.98 0.88 0.97 0.81 0.93 0.95 0.00 1.90 0.96 0.75 1.72 0.89 0.79 0.92 0.87 and lamp survival factor (LSF) High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 50–1.85 1.50 1.70 LLMF 1.00 1.84 0. January 2008.94 0.88 0.88 0.99 0.94 0.96 0.99 0.93 0.96 0.86 0.96 0.99 0.00 0.99 0.00 0.63 0.90 0.98 0.95 0.86 0.98 0. to CIE97:2005 Technical report “Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems” 2nd edition.87 0.88 0.95 0.00 0.97 0.84 0.97 0.94 0.88 0.96 0.99 0.97 0.98 0.90 0. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types.82 0.94 0.93 0. .The Lighting Handbook LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF 1.79 0.97 0.43 Chapter 8 / 17 Values acc.93 0.00 1.88 0.72 0.91 0.88 0.00 0. to specifications by lamp manufacturers.99 0.73 LLMF 1.72 0. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc.99 0.99 0.00 1.90 0.96 0.92 0.00 1.97 0.91 0.00 0.95 0.96 0.77 0.77 0.98 0.00 0.99 0.88 0.89 LSF 1.97 0.75 0.97 0.

82 0.59 0.92 0.90 0.91 0.91 0.80 0.74 0.79 0.90 0.79 0.87 0.81 0.82 0.71 0.92 0.84 0.94 0.54 0.91 0.77 0.77 0.94 0.72 0.92 0.91 0.93 0.73 0.89 0.96 0.83 0.79 0.74 0.81 0.88 0.88 0.95 0.85 0.86 0.90 0.94 0. ISBN 3 900 734 34 8 Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber).86 0.71 0.Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) 18 / Chapter 8 2.57 0.87 0.64 0.82 0.86 0.85 0.98 0.93 0.74 0.89 0.73 Reflector exposed above (self-cleaning effect) 0.78 0.86 0.95 0.89 0.60 0.89 0.81 0. V = soiled (verschmutzt) The Lighting Handbook .96 0.0 V SS S N V SS V 2.92 0.74 0.45 From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”.94 0. N = normal.75 0.5 S N Luminaire cleaning interval in years Environment type Luminaire type Bare batten luminaires 0.88 0.83 0.68 0.64 0.80 0.79 0.92 0.80 0.5 V SS S N 3.65 Dust-proof IP5X 0.68 Reflector enclosed above (no self-cleaning effect) 0.89 0.91 0.95 0.96 0.83 0.93 0.84 0.75 0. dated 2005.0 S N V SS 1.76 0.81 0.61 0.87 0.89 0.79 Indirect luminaires 0.95 0.88 0.83 0.77 0.85 0.69 0.83 0.92 0.88 0.94 0.5 SS S N V SS 1.73 0.87 0.92 0.90 0.79 0.91 0.89 0.92 0.94 0.89 0.55 0.80 0.73 0.73 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.94 0.75 0.85 0.86 0.70 0.87 0.83 0.84 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.83 0.52 Enclosed IP2X 0.91 0.0 S N 0.94 0.84 0.81 0.85 0.66 0.93 0.77 0.91 0.90 0.95 0. S = clean (sauber).51 0.65 0.

90 0.97 S 1.97 0.77 0.90 0.91 0.91 0. ISBN 3 900 734 34 8 The figures in the table above apply to reflection factors 70/50/20 and a medium-sized room (k = 2.91 N 1.00 0.84 0.96 0.56 0.55 0.93 0.90 0.00 0.55 0. V = soiled (verschmutzt) 0.92 0.86 0.90 0.72 0.5) Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber).5 3.0 5.94 0.91 0.90 0.92 0.92 0.95 0.75 Indirect SS 1.00 0.97 0.75 0.91 0.75 0.83 V 1.00 0.94 N 1.96 0.95 0.72 0.84 N 1. N = normal.86 0.94 0.75 0.87 0.72 0.84 0.55 Chapter 8 / 19 .72 V 1.72 0.84 0.83 0.91 0.95 0.72 0.92 0.95 0.91 0.92 0.86 0.00 0.87 0. dated 2005.55 0.84 0.97 0.94 0.95 0.97 0.75 0.89 0.95 0. S = clean (sauber).97 0.90 0.5 4.92 0.97 0.83 0.86 0.93 0.55 0.95 Indirect S 1.97 0.5 Illumina.92 0.92 0.75 0.91 0.97 0.94 0.92 0.83 0.94 0.91 0.97 0.86 0.0 Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) Room cleaning interval in years 0 0.86 0.60 0.97 0.90 0.72 0.75 0.95 0.83 0.00 0.86 0.00 0.83 0.94 0.75 0.84 0.86 0.90 0.0 4.55 0.86 0.83 0.55 0.72 0.0 3.Environment tion type type Direct SS 1.0 1.95 0.84 0.90 V 1.5 6.75 0.95 0.5 1.94 0.00 0.72 0.98 0.95 0.92 S 1.95 0.73 0.83 0.84 0.91 0.85 0.00 0.55 0.72 0.0 2.00 0.85 0.55 0.83 0.00 0.94 0.86 Direct/ SS 1.91 0.92 0.The Lighting Handbook 5.55 From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”.00 0.86 0.86 0.84 0.77 0.90 0.75 0.75 0.97 0.91 0.94 0.5 2.84 0.

(15) Cost of luminaire cleaning Cost of the complete job of cleaning the luminaire plus replacing faulty components in the lighting system including parts costs. 8/25) provides help for daylight-based systems. clean environment). see Chap. . Dynamic calculation models involving depreciation and interest payments are left to the financial experts and fall outside the scope of this handbook. e.g.Economic efficiency calculation A short pay-back period is usually the most important consideration when designing lighting systems. 8/15). The maintenance factor plus the general conditions have to be documented in the design process. The maintenance value can be determined precisely on the basis of the details included in the previous chapter “Maintenance of lighting installations”. The pay-back period calculation using the following forms is based on a static calculation method. office. (5) Annual burning hours Total of the daily lamp ON hours over the year. Include energy standing charges in the working price. This is a theoretical approach that delivers a guide value very quickly and is perfectly adequate for an initial estimate. The lighting calculation cannot be made until the maintenance factor has been determined.67 can be assumed (3-year maintenance interval. including the costs of the lamp and additional costs such as step ladders. (9) Maintenance factor A reference maintenance factor of 0. (16) Cost of room cleaning Labour costs for cleaning room surfaces and restoring the reflection characteristics to their new condition. weekend overtime payments or loss of production. (14) Cost of lamp replacement Cost of the complete job of replacing the lamps. (17) Energy costs per kWh Estimate a mixed price for high and low tariff. The table of burning hours (Chap. Static calculation model Pay-back time = Extra expenditure investment costs Annual saving in operating costs 20 / Chapter 8 The Lighting Handbook Definition of terms used in the economic analysis sheets (3) System power of luminaire Lamp wattage + power dissipation in control gear.

8/25 Lamp replacement interval (y) Luminaire cleaning interval (y) Room cleaning interval (y) Number of luminaires Maintenance factor Number of luminaires Itemised investment costs Cost of one luminaire Cost of one lamp The Lighting Handbook (11) (12) (13) (9) (10) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (2) (3) (1) Option 2 Installation costs per luminaire Chapter 8 / 21 .Economic analysis Building project Option 1 Luminaire type Luminaire data Number of lamps per luminaire System power of luminaire (W) Operating data Service life of system (y) Annual burning hours see Chap.

Option 1 Itemised operating costs Cost of lamp replacement Cost of luminaire cleaning Cost of room cleaning Energy costs per kWh Investment costs Luminaire costs (10) x (11) Lamp costs (10) x (2) x (12) Installation costs (10) x (13) Investment costs (18) + (19) + (20) Operating costs Lamp replacement costs (14) x (4) ր (6) Luminaire cleaning costs (15) x (4) ր (7) Room cleaning costs (16) x (4) ր (8) Energy costs (10) x (3) x (4) x (5) x (17) Ϭ 1000 Operating costs (22) + (23) + (24) + (25) Annual operating costs (26) Ϭ (4) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (18) (19) (20) (21) (14) (15) (16) (17) Option 2 Pay-back period* = (21) Option 2 – (21) Option 1 (27) Option 1 – (27) Option 2 – – = years Pay-back period* = * excludes depreciation and interest = years The Lighting Handbook 22 / Chapter 8 .

300 Double shift. 6 days/week 310 310 16 16 No Yes Table of burning hours Single shift. 5 days/week 258 258 10 10 No Yes Daylight-based control: the lamps switch on automatically when there is too little daylight available.580 1.100 1.960 3. Data is based on the assumption that there is sufficient available daylight for half the year.760 7.550 On period Days in use/year 365 365 Hours/day 24 24 No Yes Burning hours per lamp and year in hours 8. From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”.720 3. Process monitoring/control 4. 6 days/week 310 310 10 10 No Yes Single shift.760 2. dated 2005 Chapter 8 / 23 .The Lighting Handbook Working mode/shift type Daylight-based control 24-h shift working.

Taking room utilisation into account Using presence detectors or a time-based control system. they will complement each other without the levels adding up. Advanced materials Today’s reflectors and innovative surface finishes provide for more efficient luminaires (e. 1. 2. Use of daylight The Luxmate daylight-based lighting control system provides for high energy savings where sufficient daylight is available. 3. The potentialities stated draw a comparison between contemporary lighting solution options available today with the technology approx. Improvement of lamps and control gear Innovations in the electronic control of lamps. CO2 and costs Pros 1. In a project. 15 years ago. 4. Taking ageing into account The balance between the new value and minimum illuminance can be saved by dimmable control (Maintenance Control). PSP+).Refurbishment of lighting systems The following list provides clues for discussion with the customer. 5. The savings apply only on a case-by-case basis. viable savings must be accurately calculated in the design stage. Saving energy. the lighting can be adjusted more properly to the time/s of use. optimised temperatures and improvements of the lamps’ physical properties provide for extensive savings. If several measures are taken.g. Potential savings up to –30 % up to –60 % up to –40 % up to –17 % up to –25 % 24 / Chapter 8 The Lighting Handbook .

people’s error rate can be minimised by an upgraded lighting solution (e. AIF no. doctoral thesis by Susanne Fleischer. 9955). The Lighting Handbook Chapter 8 / 25 ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ . measurable increases were achieved in individual cases. AIF no. research by TU Ilmenau. ETH Zürich).g.g. Fewer errors According to various studies. allowing to perfectly adjust the lighting to the individual (e. Improved ergonomic compatibility Pros 1. 2. however. Enhanced sense of well-being Pleasant brightness levels and personal control can have a positive impact on people’s sense of well-being (e.g. Increased productivity According to various studies. 3. people’s productivity can be significantly improved by an upgraded lighting solution (e. Light Right Consortium).2.g. 4. Potential savings Please note: It is difficult to provide exact and generally applicable figures. Increased alertness The human physiology is decoded step by step. 9955). Minor increases already result in high economic benefits. research by TU Ilmenau.

and extension of the maintenance cycle result in a reduced number of luminaires required. Reduction in maintenance costs up to –30 % Contemporary luminaires frequently come in a closed design. central monitoring of installations (e. facility management tools allow for automatic. maintenance and monitoring) Pros 1. Improvements in environmental factors Today.g. WEEE and RoHS provide the basis for manufacturing luminaires.g. Additional pros Pros 1. the service life of lamps has been significantly extended (e. and thus energy savings (e. 3. AURA Ultimate LL). 4.3.g. Environmental impact has been reduced (e. They provide the basis for comparing technical lighting features and for calculating costs. PERLUCE). MELLOW LIGHT IV.g. Philips Master TL-D Xtreme. TECTON I IP). 26 / Chapter 8 . Energy savings up to –20 % Easy cleaning of luminaires. allowing for easy cleaning (e. 2. in emergency lighting/ONLITE). Extension of maintenance cycle Over recent years. 4. lead/cadmium).g. LIGHTFIELDS. Improved maintenance conditions (employment of staff for cleaning. Potential savings up to +50 % Collecting data for lighting refurbishment The Lighting Handbook The following forms are intended to help you collect all relevant data required for evaluating the situation in terms of existing lighting installations. Automatic monitoring of installations up to –80 % Today. 2. State of the art The latest lighting solutions reflect the state of the art and an improved situation in terms of lighting standards.

Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment Project Address Activities in room Contact Tel Fax Old system Option 1 Luminaire type A Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire including ballast (W) Illuminance Option 2 Luminaire type B Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire including ballast (W) Illuminance Total installed load in kW ON period each day (h) Working days per year Annual ON period (h) Power consumption in kWh/a Annual savings in kWh Basic power price kW/year The Lighting Handbook Power costs per kWh Annual power costs in kWh Annual savings Chapter 8 / 27 .

Room length Room width Room height Uniformity Emean = Emin = lx lx Reflection: wall ceiling floor u = Emin = Emean % % % Room sketch: Cleaning per luminaire/year Lamp replacement (incl. lamp) 28 / Chapter 8 The Lighting Handbook Costs Old system Option 1 Option 2 .

overvoltages (400 V) may have occurred. then switch on again Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires With 3~ through-wiring in particular.The Lighting Handbook 1. – N conductor has been confused with L conductor – directly earthed conductor interrupted – unbalanced load Visually check electronic ballasts if there are any burn marks at mains input. Fundamental analysis in luminaires with electronic ballast or dimmable electronic ballast: Note Checked ✓ Error occurring Possible cause Possible solution Luminaire was recently installed but cannot be switched on 230 V ± 10 % Power reset Faulty circuit-breaker/mains fuse After checking. perhaps install new circuit-breaker/fuse Faulty cable leading to luminaire Measure voltage at luminaire terminal Fix wiring at input end Ballast power down Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power. Replace all units affected. Chapter 8 / 29 .

Error occurring Power reset Possible cause Possible solution Note Checked ✓ Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires 30 / Chapter 8 Luminaire worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again No re-ignition after lamp replacement Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power. 180°) The Lighting Handbook . all lamps have to be replaced (make voltage reset) Wrong lamp Check compatibility with ballast. In multi-lamp luminaires. then switch on again Faulty lamp Check cause: replace lamp/s for working lamp/s from adjacent luminaire. Fit new lamp/s if cause has been confirmed. Details on ballast label must conform with details printed on lamp Faulty lampholder contact Check by rotating lamp several times to left and right (approx.

B2 or Dali) (disconnect line). Additional tests for luminaires with dimmable electronic ballast: Note Power reset with switchdim Checked ✓ Error occurring Possible cause Possible solution Dimmable luminaire already worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again. Then reconnect bus line and try to switch luminaire via control gear installed (LM or Dali). Actuate momentary-action switch at switchdim input (switching on/off) Ballast power down in LM and/or DALI bus installations Intermit signal in bus line (B1. Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires Problems with signal line and/or bus line (faulty bus) Measure power at bus Specified values: DALI: 9 to 15 V = LM: 13 to 15 V = DSI: no power measured Chapter 8 / 31 . Power reset with bus signal Ballast power down in switchdim installations Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power.The Lighting Handbook 2.

): Note Checked ✓ Error occurring Possible cause Possible solution Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires 32 / Chapter 8 After relamping. HST.3. The Lighting Handbook . Additional test for HID luminaires (high-pressure lamps such as HIT. luminaire does not work any more. etc. No contact in lampholder thread – screw-fasten lamp as deeply as possible – between lamp solder point and cap tab – remove oxidation from lamp solder point. if necessary.

new lamps should always be operated at 100% for the first 100 hours of operation . Analysis of partial function of luminaires with electronic ballast (bad lighting quality of fluorescent lamp): Note Checked ✓ Error occurring Possible cause Possible solution Lamp start delayed No earth connection in luminaires with protection class 1 Connect luminaire earth Bad dimming quality Bad earth connection Use high-resistance voltmeter to measure power between phase and earth.g. –15 °C < T < 35 °C or heavy air flow (e. and between neutral conductor and earth Poor luminous efficiency/dimming behaviour Ambient temperature of lamp too low/too high Check for heat buildup underneath high Common ceilings or at workplaces with very high temperature range: temperatures.The Lighting Handbook 4. air-conditioning system) Cool Spot Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires Cool spot neglected Do not operate lamps in positions unprovided for Chapter 8 / 33 Increasing migration of dark spots along fluorescent lamp In order to achieve an appropriate lighting quality. Too low temperatures outside.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Online lighting design tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 – 10 ZUMTOBEL Lighting DVD . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . 7 CAD data in 2D and 3D available online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ELI-LENI Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 VIVALDI – Composing light . . . . . . . . . 6 – 8 Product data sheets and installation instructions available online . . . .Chapter 9 Services Design process and tools . 5 Online product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

QuickCalc. VIVALDI optimising Requirement Design Implementation The Lighting Handbook Chapter 9 / 3 . trade fairs. studies VIVALDI reference Library Online catalogue. maintenance factor calculation. define requirements Blueprint planning Work out a concept Optimise Detailed planning Calculation Documentation Implementation Testing Maintenance Requirement Design Implementation Design tools: Communication Product catalogue. efficiency analysis. Relux. ELI-LENI calculator. Light Forums ELI-LENI calculator Research projects. events. FluxCalc. LM Energy VIVALDI visualisation. DIALux. ads and press work. congresses. roadshows.Design process and tools Design process: Communication Attention to/awareness of concepts and products Determine basic situation. system configurators. brochures.

ELI-LENI calculator Award your lighting solution a quality seal. The five descriptive quality criteria of any lighting solution (visual performance. vista. visual comfort. Further information and downloads at: www.zumtobel. vitality and empowerment) are evaluated within only a few minutes by means of a questionnaire (ELI).com/humanergybalance 4 / Chapter 9 The Lighting Handbook . The ELI-LENI calculator calculates energy consumption in a straightforward manner based on the provisions of EN 15193 (LENI).

VIVALDI – Composing light The innovative software for Humanergy Balance lighting concepts makes energy efficiency and lighting quality visible and measurable. light quantity. direction of light (directional. – Optimised lighting solutions offering a balance between energy and ergonomics – Interactive visual preparation of scene-based lighting concepts – Dynamic visualisation of light including measurement of energy consumption as well as CO2 quantity – Supports the design process in combination with lighting control technologies such as LUXMATE EMOTION – Interactive visualisation of light colour and coloured light.zumtobel. diffuse) in room settings – Project source data available from standard lighting design software such as DIALux and Relux Further information and downloads at: www.com/vivaldi The Lighting Handbook Chapter 9 / 5 .

com/60710147 6 / Chapter 9 The Lighting Handbook Product information available: – Photometric data sheets inc. IES – CAD data: 2D and 3D – Drag & drop data package for DIALux and Relux – Brochures – Installation instructions – CE certificates .zumtobel.Online product information Under the “Download” tab. UGR tables and maintenance factors – Data formats Eulumdat. the online catalogue provides a list of all product specifications available for a certain product. Quick access with URL/article reference: www.

– Complete product information in PDF format. all installation instructions for the respective product are available in PDF format.Product data sheets and installation instructions available online Any product information required can be selected from the online catalogue and summarised in the form of a data sheet. charts. Additionally. up to date and country-specific: figures. images – Compilation of the product information selected in the form of a data sheet (ZIP file) – Photometric data sheets – Data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products – Quick dispatch of any part of the catalogue by e-mail The Lighting Handbook Chapter 9 / 7 .

Lightscape.CAD data in 2D and 3D available online The 2D and 3D data for ZUMTOBEL products can be downloaded free of charge in various formats. e. Rhino.com/download 8 / Chapter 9 The Lighting Handbook .g. dxf.zumtobel. 3D Studio Max etc. Lightscape. 3D Studio Max Just take a look at: www. Rhino. – Quick selection of the required symbol – 2D luminaire symbols for AutoCAD as library and in DXF format – 3D luminaires for various CAD systems – Special data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products – Available formats: DXF.

Online lighting design tools QuickCalc online: QuickCalc provides for a quick. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 9 / 9 . approximate determination of the number of luminaires required to achieve a defined illuminance level according to the light output ratio method – or vice versa: to determine the illuminance level of a defined number of luminaires. QuickCalc is available under the “QuickCalc” tab for products with calculation data. In the ZUMTOBEL online catalogue.

ZUMTOBEL Lighting DVD ZUMTOBEL data plug-in for DIALux and Relux with all available product data (Product Explorer – with QuickCalc and maintenance factor calculation). ZX2 configurator. 10 / Chapter 9 The Lighting Handbook .FluxCalc online (calculation of luminous flux): Using FluxCalc. updated versions of DIALux and Relux as well as further tools: LUXMATE Energy Light. the luminous flux of T16 and T26 lamps in relation to ambient temperature can be determined. FluxCalc also includes the influence of ZUMTOBEL’s “Cool Spot Optimizer” in the calculation. ELI/LENI calculator and VIVALDI demo version. For T16 lamps.

Personal Notes The Lighting Handbook Chapter 10 .

Personal Notes Chapter 10 The Lighting Handbook .

Personal Notes The Lighting Handbook Chapter 10 .

Personal Notes Chapter 10 The Lighting Handbook .

Personal Notes The Lighting Handbook Chapter 10 .

T.co.com www. Unit 4 .se . Zumtobel Lighting Inc.us www. N.com. New York 1258-2630 PO Box 54620 Dubai T +1/(0)845/691 62 62 T +971/(4) 214 9845 F +1/(0)845/691 62 89 F +971/(4) 214 9501 www.com.com www.com. NSW 2060 0308 Oslo T +61/(2)8913 5000 T +47/22 46 85 00 F +61/(2)8913 5001 F +47/22 46 85 02 M info@zumtobel.zumtobel.United Kingdom Zumtobel Lighting Ltd.zumtobel.hk Sweden Zumtobel Belysning Birger Jarlsgatan 57 113 56 Stockholm T +46/(0)8/26 26 50 F +46/(0)8/26 56 05 M info. Metroplaza.au M info.zumtobel. Kwai Chung. Pump Lane London Hayes/Middlesex UB3 3BL T +44/(0)20 8589 1800 F +44/(0)20 8756 4800 M enquiriesuk@zumtobel. Location Highland Office 413 3300 Route 9W Highland.au China Zumtobel Lighting China Beijing Office T5-2-152 Tayuan Diplomatic Compound No. T +852/(0)2503 0466 F +852/(0)2503 0177 M admin@zumtobel.se@zumtobel.com. 4th Floor. 1 Xin Dong Road. 3rd East Wing.com www. Chaoyang District 100600 Beijing T +86/(10) 8532 3886 F +86/(10) 8532 3889 M admin@zumtobel. 223 Hing Fong Road.The Argent Centre. Tower 1.se@zumtobel.hk United Arab Emirates Zumtobel Lighting GmbH USA and Canada Dubai Airport Free Zone.zumtobel.zumtobel.ca Norway Zumtobel Belysning Australia and New Zealand Pilestredet 75 C Zumtobel Lighting Pty Ltd 0354 Oslo 333 Pacific Highway Postbox 5829 Majorstuen North Sydney. Level 43.uk Hong Kong Zumtobel Lighting Hong Kong Unit 319.

r.ritter@lightmakers.si www.zumtobel.zumtobel.o. Office 1104 125040 Moscow T +7/(495) 945 36 33 F +7/(495) 945 16 94 www.o. Dunajska cesta 159 1000 Ljubljana T +386/(1) 56 09 820 F +386/(1) 56 09 866 M bzslowenien@zumtobel.ru . Vlastislavova 11 Praha 4 140 00 Praha T +420/(2) 41 740 301 F +420/(2) 41 740 308 M praha@zumtobel.com 02-541 Warszawa T +48/(22) 856 7431 F +48/(22) 856 7432 www.si Headquarters Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn.Denmark Light Makers AS Indiavej 1 2100 Copenhagen T +45/(0)35 43 70 00 F +45/(0)35 43 54 54 M ralf.de Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce ul.com www.zumtobel. No 1.o.cz Slovenia and Croatia Zumtobel Licht d.pl Russia Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Official Representative Office Skakovaya Str. 17 Bld.zumtobel.dk Czech Republic and Slovak Republic Zumtobel Lighting s.o.zumtobel. Narbutta 46/48 www. GERMANY T +49/(0)5261/2 12-0 Poland Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Sp.dk www.zumtobel.lightmakers.z. AUSTRIA T +43/(0)5572/390-0 F +43/(0)5572/22 826 Zumtobel Licht GmbH Grevenmarschstrasse 74-78 32657 Lemgo.o. F +49/(0)5261/2 12-7777 www.

Please contact your local sales office for further information. We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice. 04 797 525-UK 12/08 © Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Technical data was correct at time of going to press. Printed on environmentally-friendly chlorine-free paper.Art. .-No.

Master your semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Special offer for students: Only $4.99/month.

Master your semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Cancel anytime.